JP7184666B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

A gaming machine has been proposed that executes a special zone effect related to the pending display when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-137126 A

In the gaming machine described in Patent Literature 1, there is a possibility that interest in the game may decrease after the special zone effect is completed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with improved entertainment.

(A) A gaming machine that displays identification information variably and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a storage means capable of storing information relating to variable display of identification information;
a determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
Determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
As the specific display corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means based on the determination result of the determination means and a special display corresponding to the variable display being executed. display means;
change effect execution means for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display;
and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
The specific effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect ends during execution of the variable display corresponding to the determination result,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is compared to the specific display whose display mode did not change while the specific effect was being executed. is also easy to change the display mode,
The specific display whose display mode is changed to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed has a different display mode than the specific display whose display mode is changed to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not performed. easy,
A notification image that enables recognition that the specific effect is being executed can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific display,
As a display mode after the change of the specific display, a first mode and a second mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first mode,
After executing the specific effect, it is possible to execute the special effect with a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect,
When the special effect is executed, the specific display changes to the second mode,
It is characterized by
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes),
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes),
moreover,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player,
Any of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) A setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing in FIGS. 11 to 15) that can be set to the setting value of
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable probability state according to the jackpot type such as a CPU 103 that controls the
As a display result of the variable display when being controlled to the special state, a ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result is set according to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 048AKS010),
Characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved. In addition, the display result of the variable display during the special state suggests which set value is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggestive effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 10-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is enhanced.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions related to gaming machines of the following (5) to (13). Conventionally, in a game machine, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-218044, there is a special system in which the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is high during the period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times after the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to change to a plurality of settings that are controllable to the state or that have different advantages for the player as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, and effects ( There was a setting suggestion production). However, the above-described conventional gaming machine has room for improvement in the setting suggestion effect during the special state, and in view of this point, there is a demand for the provision of a gaming machine that can improve the amusement of the game in the special state. .

(5) A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko game) that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player when the display result of the variable display is a specific result Machine 1, etc.) and
Any of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, values from 1, which is the most unfavorable set value for the player, to 6, which is the most advantageous set value for the player) A setting means (for example, CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing in FIGS. 11 to 15) that can be set to the setting value of
After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable probability state according to the jackpot type such as a CPU 103 that controls the
As a display result of the variable display when being controlled to the special state, a ratio of displaying a predetermined result which is a part of the display result different from the specific result is set according to the set value set by the setting means. (For example, CPU 120 for effect control that executes the processing of step 048AKS010),
Characterized by

According to such a configuration, the display result of the variable display during the special state suggests which set value is set, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5) above,
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means continues the special state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the probability variable state is a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the jackpot game state. such as ending when a special game is executed),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the normal state is reached without being controlled in the advantageous state after being controlled in the special state.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) or (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of the predetermined result (for example, types A to types C, etc.),
The type of the predetermined result to be displayed differs according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, different types of predetermined display are displayed at different ratios depending on the set value),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which type of predetermined result is displayed.

(8) In any of the gaming machines (5) to (7) above,
By setting the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display of the target which has not yet been disclosed as a special result, a pre-reading effect is executed to foretell that the display result of the variable display of the target will be the specific result. Further includes a prefetching effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 etc. that executes the prefetching chance eye at step 048AKS012),
The predetermined result is a display result different from the special result (for example, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of patterns different from the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the predetermined display. etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to differentiate the special result and the predetermined result as the look-ahead effect, and prevent confusion with the advance notice effect for the advantageous state.

(9) In any of the gaming machines (5) to (8) above,
By setting the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display of the target which has not yet been disclosed as a special result, a pre-reading effect is executed to foretell that the display result of the variable display of the target will be the specific result. Further includes a prefetching effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 etc. that executes the prefetching chance eye at step 048AKS012),
The predetermined result is a display result different from the special result (for example, the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the look-ahead chance eye is a combination of patterns different from the fixed decoration pattern of the non-reach combination that constitutes the predetermined display. etc.),
While the special result can be displayed continuously in multiple variable displays, the predetermined result is restricted so as not to be displayed continuously in multiple variable displays (for example, the look-ahead chance number is While it is possible to display continuously, the predetermined display is restricted so that it is not displayed continuously),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion with the look-ahead effect due to the continuous display of the predetermined results.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (5) to (9) above,
At the timing of being controlled to the normal state after being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a predetermined frequency display effect indicating the frequency with which the predetermined result is displayed in the special state (for example, the process of step 048AKS052 is executed. 11-28 (f) for effect control CPU 120 etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the player can confirm the frequency with which the predetermined result is displayed, and can easily predict the set value.

(11) In any one of the gaming machines (5) to (10) above,
After being controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state and first controlled to the special state, if the state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the advantageous state again in the special state, the state is controlled to the normal state. At the timing, it is possible to execute a predetermined frequency display effect that indicates the frequency at which the predetermined result is displayed (for example, once it is controlled to a variable probability state, it does not become a big hit again and becomes a normal state only at the timing when the predetermined display such as displaying the count value provided according to the type of
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily guessed by the continuous residence.

(12) In the gaming machine of (10) or (11) above,
A detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B, etc.) that detects the action of the player is further provided,
The predetermined frequency display effect can be executed when the player's motion is detected by the detection means (for example, based on the detection of the player's motion on the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B, display a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, an effect can be executed according to the taste of the player.

(13) In any one of the gaming machines (10) to (12) above,
When the special state is continuously controlled a plurality of times, at the timing of transition from the special state to the normal state, the display effect corresponding to the special state a plurality of times is performed without executing the display performance of the predetermined frequency. Execute a total number display effect that displays the number of game media given during the state (for example, if Yes is determined in step 048AKS051, execute the processing of step 048AKS054, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, since the total number display effect is executed instead of the predetermined frequency display effect, the interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 112IW. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of another execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an execution rate and an appearance rate of the notice Y of the characteristic portion 53AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an execution ratio and an appearance ratio of the advance notice Z of the characteristic portion 53AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 53AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of characteristic part 57AK. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing specific display processing of a characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in specific display processing. It is a figure which shows the change timing of the display mode of a specific display. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display change pattern of a specific display of characteristic portion 57AK; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing transition ratios of zones; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the modification of characteristic part 57AK. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the first special figure in the variable probability state. It is a figure showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the second special figure in the variable probability state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM clear processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing; It is a flow chart showing a winning random number value determination process. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display result determination module; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio, such as the execution presence or absence of a look-ahead chance eye. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows an example of determination processing, such as a non-reach-loss stop design. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of predetermined display determination processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of execution/non-execution of a predetermined display and a determination ratio thereof; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the kind of predetermined display, and its determination ratio. It is a flow chart which shows an example of final fluctuation production setting processing. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example when predetermined display and count value display for every kind are performed. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in a modification, and the numerical range of a small hit. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of production mode determination processing, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a production mode storage buffer. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the determination ratio of production mode next time. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion effect processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of whether or not a setting suggestion effect is executed and the determination ratio thereof; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of setting suggestion effects and their determination ratios; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of mode suggestion effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of mode suggesting effects and their decision ratios; It is a timing chart showing the transition of the game state and the production state. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of setting suggestion effects and their determination ratios; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of specific production execution setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution presence or absence of specific production|presentation, and its determination ratio. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of types of specific effects and their determination ratios; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special production processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the kind of special production|presentation, and its determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example when specific production|presentation and special production|presentation are performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an eye-catching image is displayed as a character image displayed as a specific effect;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 112IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 112IW will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and control is possible to achieve an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different rates according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of other characteristic portions may be configured so that the setting can be changed in the same manner as the characteristic portion 112IW. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board constituting a game board surface. (gauge board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Also, in the game machine frame 112IW003, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is positioned between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into the lock to unlock it. 112IW003a cannot be released.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting key 112IW051 for changing set values such as a winning probability of a big hit (ball output rate), etc., to be described later in the setting change state. A setting switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with operation units that can be operated by the player, such as the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052, is accommodated in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11. The setting keys 112IW051 and the setting-switching switches 112IW052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case 112IW201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 having the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 112IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In this characterizing portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may also be used.

A display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged at the upper left part of the board case 112IW201. In other words, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 112IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic portion 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A is attached to cover the right side of the case 112IW201 from the rear side. This security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1, It is composed of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. Security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of short piece 112IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 112IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 . Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. Separation releases the covering state of the long piece 112IW500Ab, so that it becomes operable.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 112IW, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the security cover 112IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened by a game arcade clerk or the like using the door key, the setting values cannot be changed by operating the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switches 112IW052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the gaming hall, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 A setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by inserting an illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate from between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a game device such as a card unit or the like installed between the spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 to change the set value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the security cover 112IW500A covers the right rear side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting keys 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052, the board can be opened through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the status of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In this characteristic part 112IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables such as the determination table shown in FIG. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-4(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. - In addition to the display result determination table (set value 3) shown in -4 (C), the big hit type determination table (not shown), the big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), the losing variation pattern determination table (not shown), the normal figure A display result determination table (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3.

(Display result determination table)
FIGS. 8-4A to 8-4C are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each case where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do.

In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of winning a big hit. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 112IW, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player is (the probability of a big hit increases), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In this characteristic part 112IW, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning hole (big winning hole, second big winning hole, first starting winning hole, second starting winning hole, general winning hole) It is possible to calculate various types of winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases based on the aggregation.

Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 has a four-digit display. The display portion of each digit is composed of 7 segments composed of 7 segments each drawing a figure of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments.

Display contents are displayed on the first and second digit display portions, and numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third and fourth digit display portions. Display No. 1 displays a short-term continuous ratio, and display No. 2 displays a short-term role ratio. In display No. 3, the total cumulative consecutive ratio is displayed, and in display No. 4, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60,000 prize balls. be done.

The short term here means a period during which the number of awarded balls (the number of won balls) was 6000. The period for calculating the total sum means the total period from when the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the role ratio is once reset.

In the above example, the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base are calculated regardless of the game state, but they may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the consecutive ratio may be the ratio of the total number of prize balls accounted for by the number of prize balls entered into the big prize opening during the jackpot game state. In addition, the role ratio is defined as the ratio of the number of prize balls entering the second starting prize opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls entering the large prize opening during the big win game state to the total number of prize balls. good too. Also, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

When the short-term consecutive ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, "y6." "y7." is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. Further, when the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the short-term continuous ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed in percentage (%) on the third and fourth digit display portions.

When the total cumulative winning ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, "A6." , "A7." is displayed on the first and second digit display portions. Further, when the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) in the third-digit display section and the fourth-digit display section, and the total cumulative continuous ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative role ratio is displayed, the total cumulative role ratio is displayed in percentage (percentage display) in the display portion of the third digit and the display portion of the fourth digit.

When base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, "bL." "B6." In addition, when base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative continuous ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) in the third and fourth digit display parts, and base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed in percentage (% display) on the third digit display section and the fourth digit display section.

Furthermore, the short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1, and base 2 are displayed based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030 for the set value set at that time. Short-term consecutive ratio, short-term consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, total accumulated consecutive ratio, base 1, base 2 display can be sequentially changed.

In addition, in this characterizing section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base at each setting value can be displayed. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these continuous ratio, role ratio, and base.

In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, a form in which the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, is calculated and displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 112IW029 may display the history of the number of awarded balls without calculating the consecutive ratio, the role ratio, and the base. good.

(setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing part 112IW will be described. Figures 8-5 and 8-7 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characterizing section 112IW. In this characteristic portion 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001-S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1-S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, it returns to step 112IWS004 and repeats the processing of steps 112IWS004 to S005. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, the processing after step 112IWS006 is executed, and the change and confirmation of the set value, the initialization of the RAM, the restoration processing, etc. are executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization command, a command for recovery, and the like, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and a command can be omitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value is the factory default value (for example, a value other than "0" or a possible setting value) (step 112IWS006). If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If the settings are not factory default (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the setting values have already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the data to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by performing the same processing as in step S4. It is determined whether or not data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, at step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 112IWS008). At step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting changing flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the change of the setting value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

At step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of "E") indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is ON (the door (game machine frame 112IW003) is open) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is ON (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is ON, RAM clear processing for clearing the contents stored in the RAM 102 is executed after the processing related to setting change is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120AKSA03.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is off (the door is closed) (N at step 112IWS011) or if the setting key 112IW051 is off (N at step 112IWS012), is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process does not proceed to step 120AKSA01, but proceeds to loop processing. In addition, before entering the loop processing, the control (processing of step 112IWS010) of transmitting the RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 may be executed.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S013, in this characteristic part 112IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 112IWS007, N of S008), or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 112IWS006 Y), if a power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 112IWS009 Y), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. On this condition, the setting values after step 120AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is on, depending on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, ON/OFF of the clear switch), processing for confirming the setting (setting confirmation processing) or processing for changing the setting (setting change) is performed. process). It should be noted that error processing may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

When the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating to start the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). Moreover, when the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change command or the setting confirmation command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light-emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is the factory-shipped value (for example, "0") (step 120AKSA06). If it is the setting value at the time of shipment from the factory (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the setting value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). At step 120AKSA07, the set value stored in the backup area of RAM 102 is updated to "1".

At step 120AKSA07, if the setting value is the value at the time of shipment from the factory, the setting value is set to "1" as the initial value, but other setting values may be used as the initial value. The set value is also set to the initial value "1" when there is a RAM abnormality error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed). You may make it In this case, when the processing of step 112IWS010 is executed (step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM abnormality flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM abnormality flag is on or not.

If the set values are not factory-set values (step 120AKSA06; No), or after executing the process of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08 ).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting changing flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is ON (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 120AKSA12). The setting value is updated each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, if the setting value is "1", it is updated to "2", if the setting value is "2", it is updated to "3", and if the setting value is "3", it is updated to "1". You should update. Note that a specific set value may be specified by operating the setting switch 112IW052.

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, so the process for changing the setting is not executed. In this case, or if the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not ON (step 120AKSA11; No), after executing the processing of step 120AKSA12, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is OFF. (Step 120AKSA13).

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains on (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue setting confirmation processing or setting change processing. When the setting value is updated in step 120AKSA12, the setting value after updating is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 by executing the process of step 120AKSA08 again.

If the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120AKSA13; Yes), it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA14; Yes), reset the setting changing flag (step 120AKSA15), and send a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16 ).

When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and a set value command indicating the set value is sent to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). Note that the setting value command may be transmitted only when the setting value is updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19). If the RAM clear flag is ON (step 120AKSA19; Yes), RAM clear processing is executed (step 120AKSA20). In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clearing process, among the storage areas of the RAM 102, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as ratio and base, and set value information are retained without being cleared.

After that, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as in step S9 (step 112IWS033).

If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped by the same processing as in step S6. conduct. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 112IWS023).

After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034. The processing of steps 112IWS034-S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10-S12 shown in FIG.

The set values may be displayed on the image display device 5 at step 120AKSA08. Then, subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5 .

Also, during execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are set to a mode in which they are not displayed during the normal game (for example, a mode in which all segments of the 7-segment LED are lit or blinked). good too. By notifying using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. It should be noted that the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes during the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting values are stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM), unless the setting change is completed. , may be regarded as an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, a setting change flag (not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM that stores the setting value, and at the end of the setting change process, the setting change flag is stored. If the setting change flag is ON when the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, game control main process) is executed, an error is assumed. As described above, in a situation where the setting change process does not proceed normally, the game arcade clerk may misunderstand that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error will occur, so that the setting change can be reliably completed.

Also, at step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read out from the backup RAM, and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be extinguished, or if all segments are lit during setting confirmation processing and setting change processing, all segments may be blinked).

FIG. 8-8 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIG. 8-8, when the setting key 112IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting change processing (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, setting confirmation processing (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA13, etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, initialization processing (step 120AKSA20, etc.) is executed if the clear switch is on, and recovery processing (step 112IWS024) if the clear switch is off. is executed.

In this embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 8-5 to 8-7, while making some processing common, branching according to the state of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) , the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the recovery process are executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as individual processes.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 (A) and 8-9 (B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends when the supply stops. When the power is turned off and the large winning opening is open during a jackpot game or the like, power supply to the solenoid 82 is stopped and the large winning opening is closed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 112IW051 is turned ON. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

In this state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated).

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9(E), the CPU 103 stores the set values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 112IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the game arcade clerk or the like. stored (updated) in the backup area of At this time, the CPU 103 displays on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term consecutive ratio, the short-term consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, the total cumulative consecutive ratio, Display base 1 and base 2. Also, RAM
If pending storage is stored in the backup area 102, the pending storage is cleared. Also, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 8-9 (A) (the timing when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off), RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-9(F), the CPU 103 displays "E.E.E.E." It is possible to

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characterizing portion 112IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“3” for the characteristic portion 112IW) may be displayed.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 53AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 53AK will be described. The pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 53AK is changeable in setting. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose settings can be changed, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and control is possible to achieve an advantageous state (jackpot game state) at different rates according to the set value. In the characteristic portion 53AK, it is possible to execute a notice effect for notifying/suggesting that the display result will be a big win (that the game will be controlled to a big win game state) during execution of the variable display.

Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 7 when the variable display is started. In the pachinko game machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning a big hit. Notice effects (especially highly reliable notice effects that will result in a big hit) are easier to execute when the display result is a big hit. The higher the value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, the reliability means the reliability of the big win, and means the ratio of the big win when the announcement effect is executed.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the occurrence rate or reliability of the announcement effect may differ from what is intended due to fluctuations due to the set values, or the reliability may change, which may confuse the player. In the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 53AK, by adjusting (changing) the execution ratio of the notice effect according to the setting value, at least one of the appearance rate of the notice effect and the reliability is set to the same or substantially the same range. adjusted within. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be set as intended, and the player can be prevented from being confused by the notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent setting values from being unreasonably suggested depending on the execution frequency of the advance notice effect.

It should be noted that, when adjusting the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect, it may be difficult to completely match the ratio after the decimal point. Therefore, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 53AK includes not only the appearance rate and the reliability of the advance notice effect that are the same, but also those that are adjusted within substantially the same range. It should be noted that the same effect as in the case of being the same can be obtained as long as they are within substantially the same range. The term “substantially the same range” may be within a predetermined range, such as within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate or reliability of the advance notice effect as perceived by the player. may be within substantially the same range such that they are felt to be the same.

FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the announcement X as the announcement effect of the characteristic portion 53AK. FIG. 9-1(A) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three levels of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" for the set value "1", "1/250" for the set value "2", and the set value In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of execution of the notice X to the big hit (percentage of the total variation) A (= jackpot probability a x execution ratio b) is ``1/600'' when the setting value is ``1'', and the setting value is ``2''. is "1/500" in the case of , and "1/400" in the case of the set value "3".

In addition, the probability of losing c (= 1-jackpot probability a) is "299/300" when the setting value is "1", "249/250" when the setting value is "2", and "199" when the setting value is "3". /200”. The execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of losing is "1/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) B (=probability of failure c×execution ratio d) at which the advance notice X is executed and becomes a failure is approximately “1/100” at any set value.

The appearance rate C (=A+B) of the notice X in all fluctuations is "7/600" when the setting value is "1", "6/500" when the setting value is "2", and "5" when the setting value is "3". /400”. In addition, the reliability D (=A/C) of the notice X is "1/7" (approximately 14%) for the set value "1" and "1/6" (approximately 17%) for the set value "2". ), and when the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

In this way, when the execution ratio of the announcement effect (notice X) is the same regardless of the setting value and without adjustment, the higher the set value, the higher the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect. In particular, when the reliability is based on the set value "2", an error of about plus or minus 3% occurs.

FIG. 9-1(B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and reliability of advance notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1(B), unlike the example shown in FIG. When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". In addition, the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "3/299" for the setting value "1", "2.5/249" for the setting value "2", and "2" for the setting value "3". /199”.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "6/500" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and to suitably execute the announcement effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the announcement effect.

In this embodiment, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice X as the notice effect are adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Such adjustments are made for highly reliable notice effects and special notice effects that are featured (that is, some notice effects), and for other notice effects, without adjusting the execution ratio, depending on the set value The appearance rate and reliability may be changed. That is, the other notice effects may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. By doing this, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are adjusted for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability is generated, and the processing burden of deciding whether or not to execute the notice effects. increase can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-1(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is different, but even if it is the same as shown in FIG. 9-1(A), the notice X The rate B of execution and failure is approximately the same "1/100" regardless of the setting value, and the appearance rate C of the notice X is also approximately the same (approximately 1.17% to 1.25%). , the execution ratio d of the advance notice X at the time of failure may be the same regardless of the set value.

In this case, by adjusting only the execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big win, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be made within the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

FIG. 9-1(C) shows an example in which the rate of appearance of notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. ”, “2/249” for the set value “2”, and “1.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the execution frequency of the notice effect, and from suggesting the set value unnecessarily. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the appearance rate C of the notice X is common regardless of the setting value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated, and the set value can be estimated. Incidentally, by matching the appearance rate, the reliability corresponding to the set value may change relatively greatly (about plus or minus 10%), such as 30% to 50%. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

FIG. 9-1(D) shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is 2.5/299 when the set value is 1. ”, “2.5/249” for the set value “2”, and “2.5/199” for the set value “3”. The execution ratio b of the notice X at the time of the big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the notice X regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to make the occupancy rate of the advance notice X in the case of a big win common, and to maintain a suitable rate of appearance at the time of the big win.

In this case, the reliability D of the notice X is common regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide playability according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the set value can be estimated, so an improvement in the operation rate of the pachinko game machine 1 can be expected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-1 (D), by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of failure according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X was adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value. However, by making the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of losing the same regardless of the set value, and by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the big hit according to the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. It may be adjusted so that In this way, by sharing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of loss, which accounts for most of all fluctuations, there is no need to determine the set value for each change of loss and make the execution ratio different, so the notice effect can reduce the control burden for executing

The jackpot probability a shown in FIGS. 9-1(A) to 9-1(D) and the adjustment examples of the advance notice execution ratios b and d are just examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values, it is necessary to make the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set values. Moreover, at least one of the notice execution ratios b and d should be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is set to be the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the notice is adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a×b+(1−a)×d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the setting value. At least one of b and d should be adjusted. In addition, when the reliability D of the announcement effect is set to be the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the announcement effect is equal (a×b)/(a×b+(1−a)×d) regardless of the setting value. At least one of the advance notice execution ratios b and d may be adjusted so that the same (substantially the same) are obtained.

In the execution ratio shown in Fig. 9-1, the execution ratio according to the jackpot type was not considered, but if there are multiple jackpot types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) according to the jackpot type can be different. For example, the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-1, and there are normal jackpots and probability variable jackpots as jackpot types. explain.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-2(A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the variable probability jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 9-1. In this example, the execution ratio b1 of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot is "60/100" when the setting value is "1", "50/100" when the setting value is "2", and "3" when the setting value is "3". In this case, it is "40/100". Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all variations) A1 (=probability of normal jackpot a1×execution ratio b1) of execution of advance notice X to the normal jackpot is “1/1000” regardless of the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-2(A), the execution ratio b2 of the notice X at the time of the probability variable jackpot is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio of the probability variable jackpot when the notice X is executed (percentage of all fluctuations) A2 (= probability variable jackpot probability a2 × execution ratio b2) is set to “1/1200” for the set value “1” 2", it is "1/1000", and the setting value is "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio (percentage of total variation) A (=A1+A2) that becomes a big hit when the notice X is executed is "44/24000" when the setting value is "1" and "48/24000" when the setting value is "2". ”, and “54/24000” when the set value is “3”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-2(B), the execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of failure is "196/(299×80)" for the setting value "1", and " 192/(249×96)”, and “186/(199×120)” for the set value “3”. Therefore, the ratio of failure due to the execution of advance notice X (percentage of all fluctuations) is "196/24000" for the setting value "1", "192/24000" for the setting value "2", and "192/24000" for the setting value "2". 3" is "186/24000".

As a result of the above, as shown in FIG. 9B, the appearance rate C (=A+B) of the advance notice X in all fluctuations is "1/100" regardless of the set value. In this way, when there are a plurality of jackpot types, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect for each jackpot type, the appearance rate of the notice effect is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. can be By doing so, while the execution ratio of the notice effect is within the same or substantially the same range, when the notice effect is executed, the ratio of which jackpot type will be different depending on the setting value. Execution of the advance notice effect leads to expectation of a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot).

In the example shown in FIG. 9-2, the appearance rate of the notice X is adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of the normal jackpot. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by varying the time execution rate. That is, at least one of the announcement execution ratios b1 and b2 and d should be adjusted so that the appearance rate C=a1×b1+a2×b2+c×d of the announcement X is the same (substantially the same).

Further, the reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by varying the execution ratio of the notice X according to the jackpot type. In this case, regardless of the setting value, the reliability D of the advance notice effect D=(a1×b1+a2×b2)/(a1×b1+a2×b2+((1−a1−a2)×d) is the same (substantially the same). At least one of the execution ratios b1 and b2 of the notice and d may be adjusted as follows.By doing so, the notice effect is executed while the reliability of the notice effect is the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the ratio of which type of jackpot is to be won differs depending on the set value, it is expected that a specific jackpot (for example, variable probability jackpot) will be achieved by executing the advance notice performance according to the set value.

Further, for some of the advance notice effects among the advance notice effects, the execution ratio of the specific jackpot type may be executed at the same execution ratio regardless of the set value. For example, there are normal big wins and variable probability big wins (distribution of 50% of the big win types) as the big win types, and a notice Y for notifying that the big wins will be the variable probability big wins may be executed as the advance notice effect. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the case of a normal jackpot or a loss, the execution ratio of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Y at the time of the variable probability big hit is "60/100" for the set value "1", "50/100" for the set value "2", and "40/100" for the set value "3". 100”. The jackpot probability is the same as the example shown in FIG. 9-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the advance notice Y of all fluctuations is "1/1000" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the advance notice Y for notifying that the probability variable big win will be achieved can be executed at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it is possible to foresee that the variable probability big hit will occur regardless of the set value. In addition, since the advance notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the notice Y is executed only at the time of the variable probability big hit, so the reliability is 100%.

A foretelling effect for foretelling the possibility of a variable probability big hit may be executed when the game is lost. For example, in the case of executing the advance notice Z to give notice of a variable probability big hit as the notice effect, as shown in FIG. /100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution ratio b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probability variable jackpot is the same as the execution ratio of the notice Y shown in FIG. /1000”. Then, the execution ratio d of the notice Z at the time of failure is "3/2990" for the set value "1", "2.5/2490" for the set value "2", and "2" for the set value "3". /1990”. The rate B at which the advance notice Y is executed and results in a loss is "1/1000" in any set value.

By doing so, the appearance rate C of the advance notice Z in all fluctuations is "2/1000" regardless of the set value. Also, the reliability D of the advance notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value, resulting in an unintended rate, and in the case of a big win, a notice of a probability variable big win. Z can be performed favorably. In addition, since the advance notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value when a normal jackpot is won, the processing load can be reduced. Either the appearance rate or the reliability of the advance notice Z may differ depending on the set value.

Next, an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect in 53AK will be described. The lower arrows in FIG. 9-5(A) indicate that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. indicates that there is When it is decided to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image 53AK001 as shown in FIG. is executed. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that there is a high possibility of being controlled in an advantageous state without being conscious of the set value. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 9-5(C), the decoration symbols showing the number 7 are stopped in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-5(D), the characters "Super Reach!" are displayed, and, for example, as shown in FIG. be started. During the ready-to-win performance of super-ready-to-win, for example, as shown in FIG.

Then, for example, just before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. be. As a result, the player comes to expect a variable probability big win. In particular, in the case of the notice Y, it is confirmed that the probability variable jackpot will be achieved, so the interest is improved.

In addition, when both the notice Y and the notice Z are made executable, the effect is to give notice/suggestion that both of them will result in a variable probability big hit. It is preferable to make some presentation modes such as contents different.

After that, when the display result is a big win, a message indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 9-5(G), and a big win combination is displayed as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern is derived and displayed. Note that the effect mode of the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 9-5 is an example, and any effect mode may be used as long as the effect can suggest/predict whether the game will be a big hit or the probability of a variable hit.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 53AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the set values are provided in three stages from 1 to 3, but the set values may be set in two stages or less or in four stages or more (for example, six stages). Also, the larger the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. However, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous the probability of a big win for the player. Also, the big-hit probability according to the setting value shown in FIG. 9-1 etc. is also an example, and the step-by-step big-hit probability according to the setting value is sufficient.

In the above embodiment, the execution ratio of the notice effect is set to the set value so that at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for all set values (set values 1 to 3) is the same or substantially within the same range. I was trying to change (adjust) accordingly, but among the multiple types of setting values, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of some setting values is the same or almost within the same range. may For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the first setting value (for example, setting value 1) and the second setting value (for example, setting value 2) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. good. Also, when the set values are in six stages, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect of the first set value group (for example, set values 1 to 3) is set to be the same or within substantially the same range. , at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effects of the second set value group (eg, set values 4 to 6) may be set to be the same or substantially within the same range.

In the above embodiment, as the specific effect, the appearance rate and reliability of at least some of the advance notice effects are set to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values, but the specific effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, when determining the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs on the side of the effect control board 12, by varying the determination ratio of the type of ready-to-win effect and the number of pseudo-runs according to the set value, First, the appearance rate and reliability of each ready-to-win effect and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo-run number may be controlled to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

Further, when determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, a table in which a different execution ratio is assigned for each set value may be used to decide whether to execute the notice effect. A table serving as a reference may be provided, a table corresponding to the set value may be generated by calculating a parameter corresponding to the set value in the table, and whether or not to execute the notice effect may be determined using the generated table.

The execution ratio, appearance rate, and reliability of the advance notice effects shown in FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4 are examples, and can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. Further, as the advance notice effect, other advance notice effects other than the advance notice effects shown in the above embodiments may be executable. In such other notice effects, the appearance rate and reliability may be the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set values, and in some or all of the other notice effects, the set values The rate of occurrence and the degree of reliability may be changed according to the set values assuming the same execution ratio regardless of the number. For example, among the notice effects, the notice effects with relatively high reliability are set so that the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the setting value, and the reliability is relatively low or the appearance rate is low. A high advance notice effect may be executed at the same rate regardless of the set value. By doing so, compared to the case where the appearance rate and reliability are the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values for all the notice effects, the control burden related to the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effects is reduced. can be mitigated.

In addition, for a specific notice effect out of multiple types of notice effects, it is executed even if some setting values are lost, and if it is other setting values, it is not executed (or is executed). difficult). For example, a specific announcement effect with a high degree of reliability (such as a jackpot probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of loss in the case of a low setting value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high setting value (such as In the case of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 steps, it may be possible to execute at the time of failure. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected performance by failing despite the execution of the specific advance notice performance, and to suggest/notify that the set value is high.

In the diagrams shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the execution ratio of the notice X is shown as the notice effect. ) may be determined. In this case, even when determining the type of notice effect, the execution ratio of each notice effect is set to the set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each notice effect are the same or within approximately the same range regardless of the set value. It can be different according to your needs.

In the above embodiment, whether or not to execute the notice was determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss, but depending on the fluctuation pattern (whether or not there is reach and type, whether or not there is pseudo-run and number of times) at the time of loss, You may vary the execution ratio of an advance notice production.

In the above embodiment, the probability of a big hit in the variable probability state is not taken into consideration, but even in the variable probability state, the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set values. Also, depending on the game state, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values. For example, in a probability variable state (high probability state) where the probability of hitting a big hit is high and the announcement effect is easy to execute (high probability state), the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect are adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the set value, In the normal state (low-probability state), such adjustment may not be performed. In addition, between different game states, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may differ, or may be adjusted to be the same or substantially the same range. For example, if the background is shared between the high-precision high base state and the low-precision high-base state to make it indistinguishable, a notice effect (a specific notice effect ) may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range. Furthermore, regardless of the set values, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game state from being recognized as visually indistinguishable due to the appearance rate and reliability of the announcement effect.

In the above embodiment, when there are normal jackpots and variable probability jackpots as jackpot types, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are adjusted to the same or substantially the same range according to the jackpot types regardless of the set values. was becoming The difference between the jackpot types may be the size of the number of rounds of the jackpot, or the difference in the length of the time-saving state or probability variable state controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

When a small win is provided as a display result and the advance notice effect is executed even when a small win is obtained, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big win and at the time of loss can be changed according to the set value as in the above embodiment. In addition, by varying the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the small win according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted to the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. . For example, in a gaming machine in which a specific area is provided in a winning opening opened in a small winning game state and controlled to a big winning game state based on passing through the specific area in the small winning game state, advance notice of a small winning is made. Since it can be said that the advance notice effect will be a notice of a big win, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect for predicting a small win may be adjusted to be the same or substantially within the same range regardless of the set values. In this case, when changing the small hit probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect You can adjust the degree. Specifically, considering the big hit probability, small win probability, and loss probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the big hit, small win, and loss according to the set value, The appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice effect may be adjusted to be the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the set values.

If it is possible to execute a notice effect in each of the multiple fluctuations of the pseudo-run, the appearance rate and reliability will be adjusted to the same or approximately the same range regardless of the setting value only for the notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-run. You may By doing so, it is possible to easily design the advance notice effect and reduce the processing load, compared to the case of adjusting the appearance rate and reliability for all variations of pseudo-runs.

In the above embodiment, only the big hit probability is changed by the setting value, but the effect control board 12 side may change the effect mode and the execution ratio of the effect according to the setting value. For example, even if the variation pattern is the same, a different ready-to-win effect or an effect during variable display such as a pseudo-run may be executed based on the set value. By doing so, the effect mode can suggest a set value according to the execution ratio of the effect.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 53AK may be appropriately combined.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 53AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic portion 53AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 53AK),
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect executing means determines the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the rate and are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 9-1(B), (C), and FIGS. 9-2 to 9-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect execution means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), (C), 9-2, and 9 -4) You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 9-1(B), FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4). You may do so.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The ratio (for example, reliability) of being controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is the same or within substantially the same range regardless of the setting value (for example, FIG. 9-1 (B), FIG. 9 -3, Figure 9-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The ratio of controlling to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may be changed according to the set value (eg, FIG. 9-1(C), FIG. 9-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability is changed, so that the game property of guessing the reliability can be provided, and the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to anticipate a specific advantageous state according to the set value, thereby improving interest. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 54AK)
Further, the characteristic portion 53AK includes the invention related to the characteristic portion 54AK.
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 54AK is
Any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3 or setting values 1 to 6) can be set, and an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that is advantageous to the player at a different rate according to the set value game state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic portion 54AK),
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The specific effect execution means is configured to control a ratio of control to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed when the set value is the first set value, and a second set value different from the first set value. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio of control to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed at the set value is the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIG. 9-1 ( B), (D), Figure 9-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common reliability (the rate at which the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state) irrespective of the set value, so that the enjoyment of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific effect executing means varies the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1 (B), (D), and 9-4). may
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the reliability of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when controlled to be in an advantageous state.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific effect executing means may change the execution ratio of the specific effect when the advantageous state is controlled according to a set value (for example, FIG. 9-1(B), FIG. 9-4). .
According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably adjust the reliability of the specific effect.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be set to be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-1(B), 9-3, and 9-4).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and it is suggested that the control is performed in an advantageous state, thereby improving interest.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
The appearance rate of the specific effect may be changed according to the set value (for example, FIG. 9-1(D)).
According to such a configuration, although the reliability of the specific effect is adjusted, the rate of appearance changes, so the interest is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may vary the execution ratio of the specific effect according to a set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to anticipate a specific advantageous state according to the set value, thereby improving interest. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves interest.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
There are a plurality of types of advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 9-2 to 9-4).
According to such a configuration, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to expect a specific advantageous state regardless of the set value, which improves interest.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 57AK)
Next, the feature 57AK will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 57AK can display, as specific displays corresponding to the variable display, a suspended display corresponding to the suspended variable display before execution and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a pre-reading forewarning effect (holding change forewarning) that changes the display mode of the pending display and the active display.

In addition, it is possible to execute a zone effect that shifts to a zone in the effect, which indicates that the effect state is different from the normal effect state (when the power is turned on, etc.) and is in an advantageous state for the player. During the zone effect, a display or the like is performed on the image display device 5 to indicate that the zone is shifted to the effect zone. The zone effect can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display, and can notify the player that the state is advantageous over a plurality of times of variable display. Such a zone effect is also executed as a pre-reading forewarning effect indicating that it will be advantageous (such as high reliability of the big hit) based on the variable display before execution.

In this embodiment, a display change high probability zone indicating that the display mode of a specific display is likely to change is provided as a performance zone. The zone effect of the display change high probability zone is also called a specific effect. In the case of the display change high probability zone (during execution of the specific effect), the pending change notice is executed and the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the case of not being in the display change high probability zone. Thus, in the display change high probability zone, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change, that is, a big win.

Further, in the characteristic part 57AK, by shifting from the display change high probability zone to the normal effect state, even after the display change high probability zone (execution of the specific effect) ends, the display mode changes in the display change high probability zone. The display mode of the specified display is more likely to change due to execution of the pending change notice than the specific display whose display mode has not changed in the display change high probability zone. As a result, it can be expected that the display mode of the specific display will further change even after the display change high probability zone ends. The feeling can be maintained, and the amusement of the game is improved.

In the characteristic portion 57AK, in addition to the display change high probability zone, a chance zone indicating that the probability of winning a big hit is high is provided as a zone for effect. The zone production of the chance zone is also called special production. Thus, in this embodiment, a plurality of zones are provided, and it is possible to shift to one of the zones as a zone effect. Details of the chance zone will be described later.

FIG. 10-1 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 10-1(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is executed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 with downward arrows. indicates that there is The image display device 5 is provided with an active display area 57AK001 for displaying active display and a pending display area 57AK002 for displaying pending display. In the pending display area 57AK002, it is possible to display up to four pending displays corresponding to the upper limit number of pending, and the right side corresponds to old pending information and the left side corresponds to new pending information. When the variable display ends and the next variable display is performed, the active display is cleared and all specific displays (suspended display and active display) are shifted to the right.

In FIG. 10-1(A), two pending indications are displayed. Here, active indications and pending indications are all displayed as white circles in the normal fashion. Also, the zone effect is not being executed, and the state is the normal effect.

Here, when a game ball enters the winning ball device 6A, as shown in FIG. In addition, since it is determined to shift to the display change high probability zone here, the zone display 57AK003 indicating that it is the display change high probability zone is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5, and the display change high probability zone is controlled. be.

After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (C), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols for failure stops and the reserved display (specific display) shifts, a star image is displayed for the second reserved display. An effect (change-suggestion effect) in which 57AK004 moves and acts (collides) is executed. In the display change high probability zone, such a change suggesting effect suggests that the display mode of the pending display (specific display) of the action target will change (a pending change notice will be executed). Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(D), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to, for example, blue.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), at the timing when the combination of the decorative symbols for failure stops and the pending display (specific display) shifts, a change suggestion effect is produced for the first pending display. executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(F), the display mode of the pending display that is the object of the change suggesting effect changes to green, for example.

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-1(G), at the timing when the combination of the losing decorative symbols stops and the first pending display shifts to the active display, the change suggestion effect is executed for the active display. be. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(H), the display mode of the active display targeted for the change suggesting effect changes to purple, for example.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(I), at the timing when reach is established in the variable display corresponding to the active display, the change suggesting effect is executed for the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-1(J), the display mode of the active display targeted for the change suggesting effect changes to red, for example. At this time, the zone display 57AK003 is erased, and the control to the display change high probability zone ends. As described above, in this embodiment, the display change high probability zone ends in the middle of the target variable display (variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the execution of the zone effect).

After that, as shown in FIG. 10-1(K), the display mode of the active display changes to gold, for example, without execution of the change-suggestion effect at the timing of developing to super reach.

In this way, when the display change high probability zone is entered, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change. Therefore, by moving to the display change high probability zone, the player can expect a change in the display mode of the specific display and a big win. Further, even after the end of the high probability zone of display change, the change timing of the specific display (Fig. 10-1 (K)) is provided, and the specific display whose display state changed before the end of the high probability zone of display change , the display mode is more likely to change even after the display change high probability zone ends than the specific display in which the display mode does not change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

Even if it is not in the display change high probability zone, the pending display notice may be executed and the display mode of the specific display may change. However, the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is in the display change high probability zone changes more easily than the specific display whose display mode is changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone. That is, the number of times the specific display changes tends to increase in the display change high probability zone. As a result, during the display change high probability zone, the user can experience many successful experiences such as changing the display mode of the specific display, and thus the interest in the display change high probability zone can be improved. In addition, the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is in the display change high probability zone is still further than the specific display whose display mode has changed when it is not in the display change high probability zone even after the display change high probability zone ends. The display mode is easy to change. Thus, the disappointment of the player due to the end of the display change high probability zone can be suppressed, and the player's expectation can be maintained even after the display change high probability zone ends, so that the amusement of the game is improved.

In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the specific display is at the shift of the specific display and at a predetermined timing during active display. Further, in this embodiment, a change suggesting effect is executed to suggest that the display mode of the specific display will change. In particular, it is always executed at all timings when the specific display can change in the display change high probability zone. In addition, in FIG. 10-1, the display mode of the specific display is always changed (change is successful) after execution of the change suggesting effect, but there are cases where it is not changed (change is unsuccessful). . In other words, the change-suggestion effect may be false. By doing so, it is possible to effectively encourage the change of the display mode of the specific display to the display change high probability zone, thereby improving the presentation effect.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the change suggestion effect is not executed. It should be noted that the change suggestion effect may be executed even when the display change high probability zone is not set. In this case, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone may be lower than in the case of the display change high probability zone. For example, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the execution ratio of the fake change suggestion effect is lower than when it is the display change high probability zone (for example, the fake change suggestion effect is not executed), so that the relative time ratio can be lowered.

It should be noted that the ratio (success ratio) at which the display mode of the specific display changes after execution of the change suggesting presentation may be different between when the zone is not in the display change high probability zone and when it is in the other zone. For example, the success rate may be higher or lower when the display change high probability zone is not selected than when the display change high probability zone is not selected. Further, a plurality of performance modes of the change suggesting performance may be provided, and the success rate and the rate of the subsequent changing performance mode (the number of stages) may differ depending on the performance mode of the change suggesting performance. By doing so, the change-suggestion effects are diversified, and the change-suggestion effects can effectively arouse the player's expectations.

Further, when the display change high probability zone is not set, the mode of execution of the change suggesting effect may be different. When it is not in the display change high probability zone, a change suggesting effect different from that in the case of the display change high probability zone may be executed. By doing so, the production can be diversified, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that regardless of which zone it is, the execution ratio of the change suggestion effect or the determination ratio of the effect mode in the case of execution may be varied depending on whether the specific display actually changes. By doing so, the execution ratio of the change suggesting effect increases in the display change high probability zone, and the change suggesting effect in which the display mode of the specific display changes at a high rate is more likely to be executed. In addition, the success rate can be varied depending on the presence or absence of the change-suggestion effect and the mode of effect.

FIG. 10-2 is a flow chart showing the operation of the specific display process for displaying the specific display of the characteristic portion 57AK and executing the pending change notice. The specific display process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the pre-reading notice setting process of step S161 of the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, for example. Note that the position (execution timing) of the corresponding display process is not limited to the pre-reading notice setting process as long as the effect operation according to the present invention can be realized.

In the specific display process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a starting winning has occurred due to the game ball entering the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (step 57AKS001). In the process of step 57AKS001, for example, it is determined whether or not the start winning has occurred by determining whether or not the effect control command for designating the occurrence of the starting winning has been received from the main board 11 or not.

If it is determined that a starting prize has occurred (step 57AKS001; Yes), the final display mode (final display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the starting prize and the change process of the display mode of the specific display (pending change notice) A display change pattern corresponding to the effect mode) is determined (step 57AKS002).

In the process of step 57AKS002, based on the effect control command specifying the judgment result of the prefetch judgment received at the time of starting winning, the display result and the fluctuation category (such as rough fluctuation pattern classification) are read ahead, and the final display mode and display A change pattern is determined. In the process of step 57AKS002, by determining the final display mode and the display change pattern, the presence or absence of execution of pending change notice and its presentation mode are determined. In this embodiment, the pending change notice may be executed in which the display mode changes multiple times during the period from when the specific display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the specific display ends. is determined, a display change pattern (change process) corresponding to the final display mode is determined.

In step 57AKS002, first, the final display mode is determined according to the display result, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-3. In this embodiment, as the display mode (display color) of the specific display, as shown in FIG. Display modes of "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are provided. Then, as shown in the determination ratio in Figure 10-3, the display result (variation category) is at a different rate depending on whether it is "non-reach", "normal loss", "super reach loss", or "big hit" The final display mode is determined. In the decision ratio shown in Fig. 10-3, the possibility that the final display mode will be a big hit in the order of ("white" <) "blue" < "green" < "purple" < "red" < "gold" < "rainbow" (jackpot reliability), the possibility of becoming a super reach (super reach reliability), and the possibility of establishing a reach are high.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the display modes of "white", "blue", "green", "purple", "red", "gold", and "rainbow" are respectively changed to " Also written as a”, “b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, “f”, and “g”. In this embodiment, a plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided according to different colors, but a plurality of display modes of the specific display may be provided according to differences in shape, pattern, motif, and character. That is, the difference between "a" to "g" may be a difference in shape, pattern, motif, or character.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display mode of the specific display remains "white" (when the final display mode is "white"), there is no big win, and the reliability of the big win is 0%. ing. When the display mode becomes "blue", the possibility of establishing reach increases. When the display mode becomes "green", at least reach is established. Also, when the display mode becomes "purple", it is determined that the super reach is achieved. However, when the final display mode is "blue" to "purple", the reliability of the big win is low.

When the display mode of the specific display is "red", the reliability of the big hit is significantly higher (12 times or more) than when it is "purple" or less. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether the display mode becomes "red" or more. When the display mode is "gold", the reliability of the big win is further increased (60%), and when the display mode is "rainbow", it is determined that a big win will occur. In addition, since the display mode of "rainbow" is determined only 7% at the time of the big hit (generally 1/300 etc. in normal state), the appearance rate is low, and the production with scarcity value (premium production) It has become.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is subdivided, and eight levels of display modes are provided. Therefore, when the display change high probability zone is reached, the display mode can be designed to be easily changed (the number of times of change is increased), and the number of times the display mode can be changed can be increased. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-4(A) and 10-4(B), seven timings "hold 4" and "hold 3" are used as change timings (timings that can be changed) of the display mode of the specific display. , "H2", "H1", "A1", "A2", and "A3" are provided. "Hold 4" is when displayed as the fourth pending display. "H3" is when displayed as the third pending display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "Hold 2" is when displayed as the second pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "Hold 1" is when displayed as the first pending display (when winning a prize or when shifting). "A1" is when displayed as an active display (at the time of winning a prize or at the time of shift). "A 2" is when it is displayed as an active display, and the timing of the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern (when the left and right patterns are temporarily stopped due to the establishment of reach, and when all patterns are temporarily stopped during pseudo continuous It is the timing of the first big hit in the middle, etc.). "A3" is displayed as an active display, and is when developing into a super reach (at the start of a reach performance of a super reach, etc.).

As described above, in this embodiment, a plurality of change stages and change timings of the specific display are provided. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the display mode of the specific display changes, and to improve the appeal of the pending change notice.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the control to the display change high probability zone is executed at any timing from "H4" to "A1" and ends at the timing of "A2". do. Therefore, "A3" is always outside the display change high probability zone. "A3" is when it develops into super reach, so by ending the display change high probability zone before it develops into super reach, you can prevent the production from being complicated, and pay attention to the reach production of super reach. can be made Two or more change timings may be provided outside the display change high probability zone.

In the process of step 57AKS002, after the final display mode is determined, the display change pattern is determined according to the determined final display mode. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of display change patterns corresponding to scenarios of changes in the display mode of the specific display at each change timing are provided, and a plurality of display change patterns corresponding to the eventual change to the final display mode are provided. It is designed to be selected and determined from among the types.

FIG. 10-5 is a diagram showing part of the display change pattern of the characteristic portion 57AK. FIG. 10-5(A) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is b (blue). As shown in FIG. 10-5(A), in this embodiment, there are four display change patterns pt2-1, pt2-2, pt2-3, and pt2-3 as display change patterns when the final display mode is b (blue). pt2-4 are provided. FIG. 10-5 shows the display mode of the specific display at each change timing. For example, the display change pattern pt2-1 is displayed with a (white) from "H4" to "A1", and indicates that it changes from a (white) to b (blue) at "A2". In addition, the display change pattern pt2-4 indicates that "H4" to "A3" are displayed in b (blue).

When determining the display change pattern, one of the display change patterns is determined regardless of the current number of pending memories (that is, the number of pending displays or active displays when winning a prize). there is Therefore, when the display change pattern is determined to have passed the change timing at which the display mode changes (when the number of pending memories is less than the change timing at which the display mode changes), the specific display is performed in the post-change display mode. Is displayed. FIG. 10-5 also shows the number of changes in the display mode of the specific display, and the number of changes when the final display mode is b (blue) depends on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern. , 0 or 1 time. For example, if the number of pending memories is 2 or less and the display change pattern pt2-3 is determined, it is displayed in b "blue" from beginning to end, and the number of times of change is 0.

FIG. 10-5(B) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is c (green). As shown in FIG. 10-5(B), in this embodiment, seven types of display change patterns pt3-1 to pt3-7 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is c (green). . As shown in FIG. 10-5(B), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is c (green), the number of times of change is 0 to 2 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5(C) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is e (red). As shown in FIG. 10-5(C), in this embodiment, 13 kinds of display change patterns pt5-1 to pt5-13 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is e (red). . As shown in FIG. 10-5(C), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is e (red), the number of times of change is 0 to 4 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5(D) shows a display change pattern when the final display mode is g (rainbow). As shown in FIG. 10-5(D), in this embodiment, ten kinds of display change patterns pt7-1 to pt7-10 are provided as display change patterns when the final display mode is g (rainbow). . As shown in FIG. 10-5(D), the display mode of the specific display at each change timing is determined for each display change pattern. When the final display mode is g (rainbow), the number of times of change is 1 to 6 depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning and the display change pattern.

FIG. 10-5 shows the display change patterns when the final display mode is b, c, e, and g, but a plurality of display change patterns when the final display mode is other are also provided. In the process of step 57AKS002, one of the display change patterns shown in FIG. 10-5 is determined according to the final display mode. The display change pattern may be determined at any rate, but may be at an equal rate, or may be determined at a different rate depending on the display result. In the case of determining different ratios depending on the display results, it is possible to predict and suggest the possibility of a big win depending on the change timing.

The display change pattern shown in FIG. 10-5 is only an example, and display change patterns other than those shown in FIG. 10-5 may be provided. There may be fewer types.

After determining the final display mode of the specific display and the display change pattern corresponding to the change process of the display mode of the specific display in the processing of step 57 AKS002, whether or not to execute the zone effect and the type of zone in the case of execution are determined. (Step 57AKS003). As described above, in this embodiment, the effect of controlling to the display change high probability zone is executed as the zone effect. In addition, as a zone different from the display change high probability zone, an effect of controlling to a chance zone indicating a high possibility of winning a big hit is also executed. In this embodiment, a normal performance state in which zone performance is not executed, a display change high probability zone, and a chance zone are provided, and control is performed to any one of the zones when zone performance is executed.

In step 57 AKS003, first, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time has changed. FIG. 10-6(A) shows the determination ratio of whether to shift to the display change high probability zone. As shown in FIG. 10-6(A), when the number of times of change is 5 or 6, the zone is always shifted to the display change high probability zone, and when the number of times of change is 0 or 1, the display change is shifted to the zone. It is designed not to move to the high probability zone. Further, when the number of times of change is 2 to 4, the greater the number of times of change, the higher the percentage of transition to the display change high probability zone. By doing so, by controlling to the display change high probability zone, the rate at which the specific display changes increases, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

The control to the display change high probability zone ends during the variable display of the target of the pending change notice (after the change timing "a2"), but regardless of the timing at which the display mode changes, the number of times of change is The higher the number, the higher the percentage of transitions to the display change high probability zone. is finished, the rate of change of the specific display (active display) that triggered the zone transition is high. Therefore, even after the control to the display change high probability zone is finished, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the loss of interest in the game can be prevented.

It should be noted that whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone may be determined depending on whether or not the active display changes at the change timing "a3" outside the display change high probability zone. For example, the higher the number of changes, the higher the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone, and if the active display changes in "A3", the ratio of shifting to the display change high probability zone is further increased. good too. By doing so, when the display change high probability zone is controlled, the rate of change even after the display change high probability zone ends is high. You will be able to maintain your feelings better.

In step 57AKS003, when it is determined to control to the display change high probability zone, the process proceeds to step 57AKS004 without determining whether to control to the chance zone. That is, in this embodiment, the control to the display change high probability zone is prioritized as the zone effect, and whether or not to control the display change high probability zone is determined. It is not controlled. Note that the order of priority of the zone effects may be reversed. That is, after determining whether or not to control the chance zone, if it is determined not to control to the chance zone, it may be determined whether or not to control the display change high probability zone.

When it is determined not to control to the display change high probability zone, it is determined whether to control to the chance zone. In this case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the chance zone according to the final display mode of the specific display corresponding to the start winning that has occurred this time. FIG. 10-6(B) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to shift to the chance zone. As shown in FIG. 10-6 (B), when the final display mode is g (rainbow), it is always shifted to the chance zone, and when the final display mode is f (gold), there is a high probability ( 80%), and if the final display mode is other than those, it is not moved to the chance zone. By doing so, the specific display can be easily changed to a mode with high reliability of the big hit by being controlled to the chance zone, so that the expectation of the player can be improved.

In addition, although the display change high probability zone also has a higher hit reliability than the normal production state, the chance zone has a higher hit reliability than the display change high probability zone (finally, the hit reliability The display mode changes to a high degree) state. In this way, by providing multiple zones such as a display change high probability zone where the display mode of the specific display is easy to change and the chance zone where the reliability of a big hit is extremely high, and a chance zone where it is easy to enjoy the experience of success, the variations of the zone production are diversified. As a result, the performance effect is improved and the amusement of the game is improved. It should be noted that the chance zone may be set to a state in which the reliability of the big win is higher than in the case of the normal presentation state, but the reliability of the big win is lower than in the display change high probability zone.

Subsequently, the determination results in steps 57AKS002 and 57AKS003 are stored (step 57AKS004), and control to display a specific display in a display mode according to the determination result and control to shift to a zone according to the determination result are executed ( step 57 AKS005). If the control to shift to the zone is executed here, the value corresponding to the zone flag that can identify the current zone should be set. In addition, control may be executed to notify that the zone has been changed by displaying an image corresponding to the zone to be changed on the image display device 5 or the like.

If it is determined that the start winning has not occurred (step 57AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to shift to the hold display (step 57AKS006). Since the pending display shifts when a new variable display is started, in step 57AKS006, for example, depending on whether or not an effect control command designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11, the shift timing of the pending display is changed. It should be determined whether or not there is

If it is determined that it is time to shift the hold display (step 57AKS006; Yes), control to erase the hold display of the shift source (step 57AKS007) and control to display a specific display of the shift destination (hold display or active display). Execute (step 57AKS008). At this time, for example, the display change pattern is referred to, and in the case of a specific display whose display mode changes at the shift destination, control is also executed to change the specific display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. . Further, in the case of the display change high probability zone, the control for executing the change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-1 is also executed. After that, the specific display process is terminated.

After executing the process of step 57AKS005 or when it is determined that it is not the shift timing for the pending display (step 57AKS006; No), it is determined whether or not it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009). In step 57AKS009, for example, it is determined whether or not the change timing of "A2" and "A3" has come from the current fluctuation pattern and the value of the timer for measuring the fluctuation time, etc., and the display change pattern is referred to. Then, it is determined whether the display mode of the active display is to be changed at the reached change timing.

When it is determined that it is time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; Yes), control is performed to change the display mode of the active display (step 57AKS010). In step 57AKS010, for example, the display change pattern is referenced, and control is executed to change the active display to the display mode specified by the display change pattern. In addition, in the case of the display change high probability zone, control for executing a change suggestion effect is also executed.

If it is determined that it is not the time to change the active display (step 57AKS009; No), or after executing the process of step 57AKS010, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the zone effect (step 57AKS011). Here, for example, it is determined whether or not the zone effect is being executed from the zone flag, and the end timing of the zone (for example, the display change high probability zone If it is "A2", and if it is a chance zone, it is determined whether or not it is the end of the target's fluctuation). If it is not the end timing of the zone effect (step 57AKS011; No), the specific display process is ended.

If it is the end timing of the zone (step 57AKS011; Yes), the control to end the zone effect is executed (step 57AKS012), and the specific display process is ended. At step 57AKS012, control may be executed such that the image corresponding to the zone is erased from the image display device 5. FIG.

By executing the specific display processing as described above, the effect control CPU 120 realizes the effect operation of the pending change notice and the zone effect as shown in FIG. 10-1.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 57AK)
This characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristics may be added. Moreover, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Also, this characteristic portion and another characteristic portion may be combined as appropriate.

In the above embodiment, the zone effect is controlled to either the display change high probability zone or the chance zone, but the display change high probability zone may be changed to the chance zone. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-7(A), when it is controlled to the display change high probability zone, as shown in FIGS. Zone display 57AK005 indicating that it is a chance zone may be displayed from zone display 57AK003 indicating that the game is a chance zone, and the transition to the chance zone may be performed. The timing of transition from the display change high probability zone to the chance zone may be arbitrary, but for example, during variable display corresponding to the start winning that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone (variable display for pending change notice) or , when the display mode of the specific display reaches a predetermined stage or higher (e.g., e or higher). By doing so, the display mode of the specific display is easily changed, and the display change high probability zone where the success experience is easy to enjoy is shifted to the chance zone where the reliability of the big hit is extremely high, so that the variation of the performance is increased and the interest of the game is enhanced. improves. It should be noted that the chance zone may be shifted to the display change high probability zone. In addition, the zone may be changed a plurality of times during one zone presentation. For example, after transitioning to the chance zone, transitioning to the display change high probability zone may be performed at the timing when the display mode of the specific display changes, and then transitioning to the chance zone again.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-7(B)′, a zone display 57AK003 indicating a display change high probability zone and a zone display 57AK005 indicating a chance zone are both displayed, and two zones are displayed. It may be possible to migrate in parallel. By doing so, it is possible to inform that the display mode of the specific display is likely to change and that the reliability of the big hit is high, as well as the variety of effects is provided.

In the above embodiment, the change process of the display mode of the specific display (the production mode of the pending change notice) is determined by selecting and determining the display change pattern, but the determination method is arbitrary. The display mode of the specific display at each change timing may be individually determined each time. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the change timing is when the hold display is shifted. However, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display is not limited to this.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a plurality of specific displays are displayed, when pending change notice is being executed for one specific display, execution of pending change notice for other specific displays is restricted. not Therefore, after the display mode of one specific display is changed, the display mode of another specific display (for example, the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning) may change. On the other hand, in the case of the display change high probability zone, execution of the pending change notice may be restricted with respect to the specific display corresponding to the newly generated start winning. As a result, it is possible to prevent the specific display and the variable display to be noticed from becoming difficult to understand in the display change high probability zone. In this case, the specific display newly displayed in the high display change probability zone after the end of the high display change probability zone does not change its display mode. On the other hand, the display mode of the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone (that is, the specific display that triggered the zone transition) may further change. Therefore, it can be said that the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone is more likely to change its display mode than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

Even after the display change high probability zone (specific effect) ends, the specific display whose display mode has changed during the display change high probability zone is higher than the specific display whose display mode has not changed during the display change high probability zone. In addition to the fact that the specific display whose display mode changed during the display change high probability zone changes more frequently, the display mode does not change during the display change high probability zone. The specific display may not change at all, and the specific display whose display mode has changed in the display change high probability zone may change. In addition, the specific display whose display mode is changed during the display change high probability zone tends to change its display mode more times than the specific display whose display mode is not changed during the display change high probability zone.

The display mode of a plurality of specific displays may be changed in the display change high probability zone. For example, by changing the specific display other than the specific display (specific display of the target) corresponding to the starting prize that triggered the transition to the display change high probability zone to "blue", it may be difficult to understand which target is. . At that time, a pending change notice in which multiple specific displays change at the same time, and a change suggestive production that suggests that multiple specific displays will change at the same time (for example, a production in which an effect is applied to the entire reserved display area or an image acts, etc.) may be executed. In this case, a plurality of specific indications may be changed successfully, or only one may be changed. Also, the pending change notice in which a plurality of specific displays change at the same time may be executed only in the display change high probability zone, or may be executed in other zones or in a normal state where zone production is not in progress. good.

In the above embodiment, there is one type of display change high probability zone, but there may be a plurality of types of display change high probability zone. For example, a weak display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than in the normal state and a strong display change high probability zone in which the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than the weak display change high probability zone are provided. may In this case, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be made different to indicate which display change high probability zone it is. For example, the weak indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a blue zone indication 57AK003, and the strong indication change high probability zone may be indicated by a red zone indication 57AK003. Then, the weak indication change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong indication change high probability zone. In order to shift from the weak display change high probability zone to the strong display change high probability zone, the display color of the zone display 57AK003 may be changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that all of them are display change high probability zones, and it is possible to notify that the degree of expectation has changed. Further, the display change high-probability zone may include a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display has a high probability of changing and a display change high-probability zone in which the specific display tends to change more frequently.

When a plurality of types of display change high probability zones are provided, it may be possible to switch between each display change high probability zone and the chance zone. For example, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the strong display change high probability zone, and then the chance zone. Alternatively, the weak display change high probability zone may be shifted to the chance zone, and then the strong display change high probability zone may be transitioned. In addition, it is also possible to limit the transition to a specific route so that the zone does not move, or to execute an effect such that the route diverges (a effect indicating which zone to move to).

In the above-described embodiment, the change suggesting effect is a effect in which the star image 57AK004 acts on a specific display, but the effect mode of the change suggesting effect is not limited to this, and a predetermined image such as a character image is displayed. Alternatively, it may suggest that the display mode of the specific display changes due to sound, lamp, movement of the movable body, or the like. Also, the effect mode (effect device) of the change suggesting effect may be changed depending on whether the zone effect is being performed or not, and depending on which zone it is.

In the above embodiment, the zone displays 57AK003 and 57AK005 are used to notify that the zone effect is being executed and to which zone the control is performed. The zone may be notified by a lamp, an operation of a movable body, or the like. In addition, the background image may differ greatly depending on the zone, the type of zone may be displayed in the display area of the specific display (active display area 57AK001, the reserved display area 57AK002), and the display mode and color of the display area of the specific display may be displayed. may vary by zone.

A sub-display device (sub-liquid crystal) different from the image display device 5 is provided to display the type of zone on the sub-liquid crystal, or the sub-liquid crystal is made movable to notify the type of zone according to the operation and position of the sub-liquid crystal. You may Also, the display position, display size, and animation mode (update speed, operation speed, operation direction, etc.) of the specific display may be varied according to the zone type. Any one of the zone notification methods described above may be used, or any combination thereof may be used.

Part or all of the configuration of the embodiment and the configuration of the modified example relating to the characteristic portion 57AK may be combined as appropriate. Also, the invention relating to the characteristic portion 57AK and the invention relating to other characteristic portions may be combined as appropriate.

For example, by combining the invention related to the characteristic portion 57AK with the invention related to the characteristic portions 53AK and 54AK, the appearance rate and reliability of the pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice, zone effect) of the present application are the same or substantially the same regardless of the setting value. The execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect may be adjusted according to the set value so as to be within the same range.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 57AK)
(1) The game machine related to the characteristic portion 57AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display, active display) corresponding to a variable display,
A change effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010) for effect control CPU 120 that changes the display mode of the specific display,
Specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing processing of steps 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone),
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is more displayed than the specific display whose display mode was not changed while the specific effect was being executed. The mode is likely to change (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the specific effect is being executed and when the specific effect is not being executed, a change suggestive effect (for example, a star shown in FIG. image 57AK004 acting on the specific display) may be executed at different rates (for example, the change suggestive effect is executed only in the display change high probability zone).
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes.
According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
The display mode of the specific display may change more easily when the specific effect is being executed than when the special effect is being executed.
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is improved.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above,
Special effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS011) that can execute a special effect different from the specific effect (for example, zone effect of chance zone).
When the special performance is executed, the ratio of control to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher than when the specific performance is executed,
It may be possible to shift from the specific effect to the special effect (for example, see FIG. 10-7).
According to such a configuration, the presentation becomes diverse and the interest is enhanced.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and range equivalent to the scope of the claims.

As the gaming machine of the present invention, there is also a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display, an active display) corresponding to a variable display, and the display mode of the specific display is Variation effect execution means (for example, step 57AKS002, step 57AKS005, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS008, step 57AKS010 processing CPU 120 for effect control) and specific effect (for example, zone effect of display change high probability zone) can be executed Execution means (for example, step 57AKS003, step 57AKS005, and step 57AKS011 for production control CPU 120 that executes the processing), and when the specific production is executed, the specific production is not executed. Also, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change, and even after the specific effect ends, the specific display whose display mode has changed while the specific effect is being executed is displayed when the specific effect is being executed. The display mode is more likely to change than the specific display whose mode has not changed (for example, in the process of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes), The specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed is more likely to change in display mode than the specific display whose display mode changes to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not executed ( For example, in the processing of step 57AKS003, it is determined whether or not to shift to the display change high probability zone according to the number of times the display mode of the specific display changes), and furthermore, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific result, the game is played It is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of stages of set values (for example, 1, which is the most disadvantageous set value for the player) with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player), setting means (for example, CPU 103 for executing the setting value change processing in FIGS. 11 to 15, etc.); After the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means (for example, after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable probability state according to the jackpot type and a CPU 103, etc., that controls the above), and as a display result of the variable display when being controlled to the special state, a part of the display result different from the specific result A gaming machine may be mentioned in which the ratio of displaying a certain predetermined result is changed according to the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 048AKS010).

According to such a configuration, it is expected that the display mode of the specific display will be further changed, so that the interest in the game is improved. In addition, the display result of the variable display during the special state suggests which set value is set, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition to suggesting the setting value based on the display ratio of the predetermined result during the special state, the setting value may be suggested based on the execution frequency of the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone). For example, it is determined by a lottery or the like whether or not to execute a specific effect for each timing at which the specific effect can be executed, and by varying the ratio of determining the execution of the specific effect according to the set value. The specific effect may be more likely to be executed as the set value is more advantageous to the player. By doing so, when the specific effect is executed, the player can expect that the display mode of the specific display will change and that the set value will be advantageous to the player. , the game interest can be further improved.
In addition to suggesting the set value by the display ratio of the predetermined result during the special state, the specific display whose display mode has changed in the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone) is displayed after the specific effect ends. The setting value may be suggested based on the rate at which the mode further changes. For example, when the display mode of the specific display changes in the specific effect, it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not to further change the display mode after the specific effect ends, and the display mode is further changed according to the set value. By varying the rate of determining the change, the more advantageous the set value is to the player, the easier it is to change the display mode of the specific display. By doing so, when the display mode of the specific display is further changed, the player's expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player is improved, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. .
In addition to suggesting the setting value by the display ratio of the predetermined result during the special state, in the specific effect (for example, the zone effect of the display change high probability zone) or after the specific effect is completed, the display mode of the specific display The mode after change when changing is selected from a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and the selection ratio of each mode after change is varied according to the set value, so that the set value is changed to the game. It is also possible to make it easier for the mode after the change to become a specific type of mode as it is more advantageous to the user. In this way, the display mode of the specific display can be varied after the change, and the set values are expected to be advantageous to the player when the display mode changes to the specific type. is improved, the amusement of the game can be improved.
Also, in this way, if the set value is suggested by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements such as the display ratio of the predetermined result during the special state and the execution frequency of the specific effect, etc.), the game can be played with the plurality of elements. If a set value advantageous to the player is suggested, the player can be more confident that the set value is advantageous to the player, and a set value advantageous to the player is not suggested for a certain element. Even in such a case, if an advantageous set value is suggested by another element, the player can maintain the expectation that the set value will be advantageous to the player, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can improve amusement in a game, variable display of identification information is performed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific result, an advantageous state (for example, a big win) is provided to the player. A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to a game state, etc., and has a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (e.g., set values that are most unfavorable to the player). A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting value change processing of FIGS. 11 to 15) that can be set to any setting value from 1 to 6, which is the most advantageous setting value for the player. and, after the end of the advantageous state, a special state control means capable of controlling a special state with a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state (for example, after the jackpot game state is finished, according to the jackpot type, such as a CPU 103 that controls to a variable probability state), and as a display result of the variable display when being controlled to the special state, a ratio of displaying a predetermined result that is a part of the display result different from the specific result , a gaming machine that varies according to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step 048AKS010). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

Characteristic portions of other embodiments will be described below.
(Description of Characteristic Portion 048AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 048AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. As shown in FIG. 11-1, a pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame formed in a vertically long square frame shape, a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface, and a game board. It is composed of a game machine frame (underframe) for supporting and fixing the board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. In addition, a glass door frame having a glass window is rotatable about the left side of the game machine frame between a door open position where the front face of the game machine frame is opened and a door closed position where the front face is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. can not be opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11A, a first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 207SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right of the lower portion of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. In the first reserved memory display area 207SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 207SG005U, a reserved memory display for identifiably displaying the number of reserved memories (special figure reserved memory number) of variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed on the game board 2. It is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where balls can flow down.

The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball that is relatively weakly struck (left-handed) by operating the ball operating handle 30 flows down. This is the game area in which a game ball hit harder than the game ball flowing down (right-handed) passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

In addition, the left game area 207SG002L is provided with a general winning hole 10, and the right game area 207SG002R is provided with a passage gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, a general A winning hole 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. In other words, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can enter the first start winning hole formed by the general winning hole 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R can be variable. It is possible to win the second start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10 and the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and to pass through the passage gate 41. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 11-1, between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right gaming area 207SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It's becoming

The main board 11 in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment is not shown, but the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. is mounted on the back of the In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 207SG051 for switching to a setting value change state in which the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing setting values, and an open sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame are provided. Note that the setting value change state in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment is also a state in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by a store clerk or the like (setting value confirmation state).

A setting-switching main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052, is accommodated in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11. The lock switch 207SG051 and the setting-switching switch 207SG052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

Since the substrate case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the game machine frame is closed. The operation becomes possible by opening the frame for the game machine. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a game arcade clerk or the like, it can be operated only by the clerk who possesses the setting key. In addition, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing switching operation between ON and OFF, which will be described later, by means of a setting key. In the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

A display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the substrate case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and placed on top of the board case 207SG201. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is not opened, the front side when the main board 11 is visually recognized means the back side of the game board 2 with the frame for the game machine opened. This is the actual front and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing to be described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is. In other words, the set value is such that 6, which is the largest value, is the most unfavorable value for the game hall side, and 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 are values that are advantageous to the game hall side as the values become smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Become. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the probability of a big win may change depending on the set value, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value although the jackpot probability is constant. (The same applies to the characteristic portion 049AK and the characteristic portion 050AK below). In addition, the set value that is set is transmitted from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12 as a set value designation command (the same applies to the characteristic portion 049AK and the characteristic portion 050AK below).

FIGS. 11-2(A) and 11-2(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, separate display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the setting value is 1 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 2) used when the setting value is 2 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1253 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) used when the setting value is 3 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-5 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1292 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". Further, when the gaming state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) used when the setting value is 5 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1317 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), in the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) used when the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the game state If is in the normal state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1346 are 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "losers". In addition, when the game state is a probability variable state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other is assigned to "outliers".

As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, set 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6), the special figure display result is set as "big win" and controlled to a big win game state. Then, the probability of being determined increases (in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, it is 1/200, when the set value is 2, it is 1/180, and when the set value is 3, it is 1/ 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, and 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is the probability variable state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the jackpot game state compared to the normal state or time-saving state. is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the judgment value is increased.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-2 to 11-7, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state according to each setting value respectively Different (for example, if the setting value is 1, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the probability variable state for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability change for the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state The multiplier of the jackpot probability in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the multiplier of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time-saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnification of the jackpot probability in the variable state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and time saving state at each setting value is all constant (for example, 5 times ) may be set.

In addition, in each first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is the same value. A judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, Figure 11-2 (A), Figure 11-3 (A), Figure 11-4 (A), Figure 11-5 (A), Figure 11-6 (A), Figure 11-7 ( As shown in A), in the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the first special figure. Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, FIGS. 11-2 (B), 11-3 (B), 11-4 (B), 11-5 (B), 11-6 (B), and 11-7 ( As shown in B), in the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and controlled to the small hit game state is determined. It is set to 1/100.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 048AK of the present embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" regardless of the setting value is the same probability. , The present invention is not limited to this, and may vary the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to a small hit game state as a "small hit" according to the set value. Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 048AK of the present embodiment, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a "small hit" according to the variation special figure is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of determining that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variable special figure may be the same probability.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to the "big hit" or "small hit" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table in the case, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. .

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value) for the small hit determination value, 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (up to 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674), with 32767 as a reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33094 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As shown in FIG. 11-10, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination value, regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, common Numbers within the numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set to 1020 as a reference value (jackpot reference value) for the jackpot determination value, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, thereby increasing the probability. go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values determines the small hit regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value), 32767 to 33421 Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-11, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. Of the judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, Numerical values within the range plus the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpots." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, hit determination value Among them, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6 here, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, while the small hit determination value The hit determination value is a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value in the case of the set value 6 (1020 to 1674). Since it is set within the range, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. As the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the judgment value contained in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range, and regardless of the game state and setting value, hit judgment Based on the value of 32767, the variable display result is determined with the determination value contained within a continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, if the variation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is identical). In addition, depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs (small value in the display result judgment table for the first special figure) The number of determination values included in the numerical range of the hit determination value is 328, while the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the second special figure display result determination table is about 655. 2 times) On the other hand, the numerical range itself of the small hit determination value is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Furthermore, as described above, in each game state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that the special figure display result is set to "big win" and controlled to the big win game state is determined. Judgment values are assigned so that the higher the value of the set value is, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be a "jackpot" and the control to the jackpot game state will be higher (jackpot probability: set value 6 > set value 5>setting value 4>setting value 3>setting value 2>setting value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is determined to be A to big hit F). Also, when MR1 coincides with one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 11-2(A) to 11-7(B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Also, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of the big win increases, and the big win C as the big win type is more likely to be determined). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. Further, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG.

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a variable probability state based on passing through, the game ball has a different rate of passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the variation special figure (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the probability of a big hit or A setting may be provided in which the probability of a small win is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a big win game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). .

Furthermore, in the case of changing the playability according to the setting value in this way, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch, the game state is controlled to a variable probability state or a big hit game state switch).

Next, the jackpot type in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12. 11-12 are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table. In the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type in the first special figure and the second special figure, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed after the end of the big hit game, and the high accuracy high base state. The jackpot types of A to jackpot F (also called probability variable jackpot) are set. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, once a big hit is achieved, 100% probability variation control is performed. In addition, either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, only time-saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state, and the big hit G (also called non-probability variable big hit) that shifts to the low probability high base state The jackpot type and the jackpot type of the jackpot H in which the variable probability control continues until the next jackpot (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is over.

The jackpot game state by the "jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which four rounds (so-called four rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed. B" is a normal open big win in which 8 rounds (so-called 8 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player ( It is a so-called “suddenly” big hit). In addition, the jackpot game state by the "jackpot D" is a normal opening jackpot in which rounds for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated five times (so-called five rounds), The jackpot game state by "jackpot E" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state of the "jackpot F" is a normal open jackpot in which two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated ( It is a so-called “suddenly” big hit).

High-precision control and time-saving control (probability variable state) executed after the end of the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" are performed a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game state (feature of the present embodiment 100 times in the part 048AK) is executed, or the game ends when a big win game state is entered before the predetermined number of special game is executed. Therefore, when the big hit occurs again, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the big-hit game state, so that the big-hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. state.

It should be noted that, for example, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of determining a so-called definite big hit, such as big win C or big win F, may be lowered in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the ball payout rate is the highest, and as the set value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the ball payout rate becomes lower. Just do it. In addition, the ratio of the jackpot types determined according to the set value may be different. In this case, the higher the set value, the higher the payout rate for the player. As described above, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, the game interest can be improved.

Next, the game control main processing in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 11-13 are flowcharts showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. FIG. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (207SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or if the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether the RAM 102 stores a normal set value (207SGSa005).

If the setting value stored in RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), proceed to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value stored in RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) is whether or not a set value changing flag indicating that a set value change process (to be described later) was being executed before the power interruption (power interruption occurred during execution of the set value change process) is set. (207SGSa006). If the set value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), proceed to 207SGSa017. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is started while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), set the RAM clear flag and proceed to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). move on.

At 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). If the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a state where the lock switch 207SG051 is ON and the game machine frame is opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not there is (207SGSa013a).

If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), set value change processing (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed to proceed to 207SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013a; N), the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d.

If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or if the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa013d without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

At 207SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when starting the pachinko game machine 1 this time (whether to execute RAM clear processing (207SGSa013e)) or not ( 207SGSa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) is executed, and then the process proceeds to 207SGSa014; if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (207SGSa013e) without executing, go to 207SGSa014.

At 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), proceed to 207SGSa022; (207SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be Then, the CPU 103 assumes that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored to the state before the power failure (activated by hot start), and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the performance control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

In addition, at 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started while the clear switch is being operated (207SGSa017). If the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or normal setting values are not set. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is started according to a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (open the game machine frame, turn on the lock switch 207SG051, operate the clear switch, 1), the set values stored in the RAM 102 are cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes 207SGSa010 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and when the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

In addition, at 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting flashing of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa024).

After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by 1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029 stops blinking (207SGSa027) and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are flashed over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is called and started, only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be lit.

Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and the interrupt is permitted (207SGSa030). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

In addition, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that an abnormal set value is stored in the RAM 102 (set value abnormal error), or the recovery from the power interruption during the setting change described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the set value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by 1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). If the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and if the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), a set value abnormal error 1st display section 207SG029A, 2nd display section 207SG029B, 3rd display section 207SG029C, and 4th display section 207SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 207SG029, as notification (error notification) of recovery from power failure during the occurrence of or setting change. is displayed (207SGSa035).

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa036), and the game is played via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeats the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until power failure occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off by the operation of a game hall clerk, etc.), and the display monitor 207SG029 , 1st special symbol display device 4A and 2nd special symbol display device 4B execute error occurrence notification.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, when an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor 207SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are notified of the occurrence of an error, the game hall clerk or the like can check the occurrence of the error and the setting value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize recovery from power failure during change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and recovery from a power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized even in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It's becoming

Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. (207SGSa013e) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. 207SGSa021 may be executed after clearing the set value changing flag.

FIG. 11-14 (A) is a flow chart showing RAM clear processing (207SGSa013e) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the specified address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX to be described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). If the specified address is not the last address in RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), specify the next address in RAM 102 (207SGSa044), and the specified address is the address (F002) where the RAM clear flag is stored. (207SGSa45).

If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to 207SGSa042.If the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045;N), proceed to , and proceed to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear processing is terminated.

In the RAM 102 in the characterizing part 048AK of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-14B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area. Among these storage areas, the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 stores the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 stores Temporary setting values are stored. Furthermore, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 onwards) include special figure reservation memory, general figure reservation memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information that occurred in the pachinko game machine 1, and the previous special symbol and a set value read out for setting the display result determination table when determining the variable display result in normal processing (determination used set value) are stored. Backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value (for example, set value “0”) indicating the factory shipment state is set at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of shipment from the factory. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state in which a value indicating the factory shipping state is set to the leading address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change processing may be executed without fail. A display on the display device 5 or the like may prompt the user to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process.

That is, the RAM clear processing in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment is processing for clearing data other than the set values and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in addresses other than the set values.

In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK in the present embodiment, a mode of clearing data other than the set value in the RAM clearing process is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When activated by the start, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 and after in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

In addition, in the feature part 048AK in the present embodiment, the form of storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is stored in the game control microcomputer. By storing in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the processing of storing and reading RAM clear flags in RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. In addition, when storing the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102, since the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100, the RAM clear flag can be changed by the processing of the CPU 103. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

FIG. 11-15 is a flow chart showing the set value change process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first reservation indicator. 25A, the second suspension indicator 25B starts blinking (207SGSa052). Furthermore, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the setting value change process (a mode other than the jackpot A to jackpot F) (207SGSa052a).

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value of 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). If a setting value other than 1 to 6 is stored in RAM 102, or if no setting value is stored in RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the setting value is stored in address F000 in RAM 102. is set to "1" (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value from 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 as the set value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a timer for waiting for the execution of the power failure detection process to wait until the power failure detection process is executed. Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether or not the timer to wait for the start of power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa056). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processing of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa056; Y) executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game arcade management computer (207SGSa059).

Then, the CPU 103 sets a set value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting switch 207SG052 has been operated (207SGSa062). If the setting switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the set value "2", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "1", is set as the provisional set value. When the set value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the set value "3", which is one step more advantageous for the player than "2", is provisionally set. For example, the set value is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102, and a value larger by one than the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a borrowed setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a provisional set value.

Then, the CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or store the temporary set value in the address F001. Then, the display monitor 207SG029 displays the set values stored in the display monitor 207SG029.

Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF at 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the set value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the set value (or provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), and turn off all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa067a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the flashing of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 25A and the second suspension indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a provisional set value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the provisional setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. It is determined whether or not the setting value stored at address F000 is different from the provisional setting value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070).

If the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 and the provisional setting value stored at address F001 are the same (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, where the setting value stored at address F000 in RAM 102 is the same. If the set value stored at address F001 is different from the provisional set value stored at address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the provisional set value stored at address F001 in RAM 102 is stored at address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. In other words, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the provisional setting values are updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting values.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing the set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first reservation indicator. 25A, the second suspension indicator 25B starts blinking (207SGSa102). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation process (a mode other than the jackpots A to F) (207SGSa103).

In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a timer for waiting for the start of the power interruption detection process execution to wait until the power interruption detection process is executed (207SGSa105 ). Then, the value of the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the timer for waiting to start execution of the power interruption detection process has timed out (207SGSa107). If the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processing of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 is repeatedly executed, and if the timer for waiting for the start of power-off detection processing execution has timed out (207SGSa107; Y) executes a power-off detection process (207SGSa108). This power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game arcade management computer (207SGSa110).

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. Also, when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the setting value in the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (207SGSa112a). Furthermore, the CPU 103 terminates the flashing of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first suspension indicator 25A and the second suspension indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation process.

Thus, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the lighting of the round indicator 207SG131 from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first reservation indicator 25A, the second By starting blinking of the holding indicator 25B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, a player or a store clerk of the game hall can see from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changing the setting value or that the setting value is being changed. is being confirmed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, as a mode corresponding to the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, Although a form in which only one LED is lit is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 can be any of the big hits A to F shown. As long as it does not correspond, the lighting mode does not matter.

Further, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, when starting the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, the same segment is used to configure the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process or the set value confirmation process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are set at the start of the set value change process and at the start of the set value confirmation process. may be illuminated in different manners.

As described above, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, when restarting the pachinko game machine 1 after turning off the power supply once, the lock switch 207SG051 and the lock switch 207SG051 By turning on the clear switch, the set value change process is executed.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the display (base value display) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in this embodiment uses a different number of display units depending on whether the set value changing process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value change processing by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 start to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. When the setting switch 207SG052 is operated while the setting values are displayed on the fourth display section 207SG029D, the display on the fourth display section 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display section 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

Further, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, when the pachinko game machine 1 is restarted after being turned off (power off), the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the game machine frame 207SG003 is open. (The clear switch is turned off) to execute the set value confirmation process.

At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, by turning off the power of the pachinko game machine 1, the display base value using the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D is displayed. display) ends. In other words, the display monitor 207SG029 in the present embodiment uses different numbers of displays depending on whether the set value confirmation process is executed at startup or when the base value is displayed after startup is completed.

Next, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted and the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are started to be displayed on the fourth display portion 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display section 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for playing.

FIG. 11-17(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in the process of step S101 in FIG. 5 as the winning random number determination process. In this characteristic portion 048AK, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIGS. result) is set as "big hit" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state is determined and the special figure display result is set to "small hit" and whether or not to be controlled to the small hit game state is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes this random number determination process at the time of winning. , Determine whether or not it is determined to stop display the big hit pattern or the small hit pattern as a result of the special figure display, and determine whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. . As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, at the start of the variable display, it is determined whether a big win or a small win is to be made. Prior to that, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a pending display notice effect, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-17 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (207SGS521). When the variable probability flag is on, the CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state, and when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, it specifies that it is in a time saving state, and both the probability changing flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the process of 207SGS521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 11-14(B)) and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS522). Next, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, start buffer value and setting value is selected and set (207SGS524). After that, in the variable display result determination module (207SGS525) shown in FIGS. 11-19, processing is performed to determine whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "loss".

As shown in FIG. 11-19, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 determines the numerical range of the jackpot determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. data (207SGS571), and it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (207SGS572). At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined at 207SGS572 that it is within the jackpot determination range (207SGS572; Y), it is determined that it will be a big hit in the variable display (207SGS576). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 207SGS572, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not become a big hit (207SGS572; N), a small hit determination in the set special figure display result determination table The numerical value range of the value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for special figure display result determination (207SGS573), and the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is within a predetermined small hit determination range. (207SGS574).

When it is determined that the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (207SGS574; Y), it is determined that the variable display is a small hit (207SGS577). On the other hand, if it is determined that the 207SGS574 is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the variable display does not result in a small hit (207SGS574; N), it is determined that the variable display will result in a loss (207SGS575). ).

Returning to FIG. 11-17(A), it is checked whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display at the 207SGS575 (207SGS526), and when it is determined not to be a big hit (207SGS526; N) Check whether it is determined to be a small hit (207SGS527), and if it is determined that it will not be a small hit, that is, if it is determined to be a loss in the variable display (207SGS526; N), the variable display result is "miss (207SGS527a), whether or not the time-saving flag is set, that is, whether the current gaming state is a time-saving state (207SGS528).

When it is determined at 207SGS526 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the big hit type determination random number MR2 and the big hit type determination table (207SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, a pattern designation command corresponding to the determined big hit type, that is, a second pattern designation command in the case of a big hit A, a third design designation command in the case of a big hit B, and a fourth pattern designation command in the case of a big hit C. Transmission setting of a symbol designation command, a fifth symbol designation command in the case of a big hit D, a sixth design designation command in the case of a big hit E, and a seventh design designation command in the case of a big hit F is executed (207SGS534 ), after that, as a table for judging a big hit variation pattern, select and set a big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big win type (207SGS535), and proceed to 207SGS536.

In addition, when it is determined at 207SGS527 that the variable display results in a small hit (207SGS527; Y), transmission setting of the eighth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result becoming a "small hit". (207SGS531), select and set the small hit variation pattern determination table (207SGS532), and proceed to 207SGS536.

Also, if the time saving flag is not set in 207SGS528 (207SGS528; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for loss (207SGS529), and if the time saving flag is set (207SGS528; Y ), selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D (207SGS530). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition, in this feature part 048AK, in addition to these variation pattern determination table A for loss and variation pattern determination table D for loss, variation pattern determination for loss used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 A table B and a fluctuation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total pending storage number is 5 or more are prepared in advance. For the range that the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, if the setting value 1 is 1, it is 1 to 450, if the setting value is 2, it is 1 to 430, and if the setting value is 3, it is 1 to 410, 1 to 390 when the set value is 4, 1 to 370 when the set value is 5, and 1 to 350 when the set value is 6.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss B, if the set value is 1, the set value is 1 to 500, and the set value is 1 to 480 if the set value is 2, 1 to 460 if the set value is 3, 1 to 440 if the set value is 4, 1 to 420 if the set value is 5, 1 to 420 if the set value is 6 400 are assigned to each.

In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for loss C and the variation pattern determination table for loss D, when the set value is 1 within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, and set If the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned respectively.

On the other hand, in any of the fluctuation pattern determination tables for loss, 701 to 997 out of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the dynamic pattern for the super reach variation pattern are assigned regardless of the set value. there is

Therefore, in 207SGS529, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is made after the determination. Also always becomes a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, so in the determination at the time of start winning, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss .

After executing any of the processes of 207SGS529, 207SGS530, 207SGS532, and 207SGS535, using numerical data indicating each variation pattern determination table and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination set in each of these steps, random A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the numerical value MR3 (207SGS536). In this characteristic part 048AK, as shown in FIG. A variation category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit) "Other" variation category, and whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of 207SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (207SGS537), the random value determination process at the time of winning is terminated. The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

FIGS. 11-18 are flowcharts showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 11-18, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (207SGS541). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 207SGS541, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 207SG154 and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS541 (207SGS541; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the second special figure pending storage unit 207SG151B , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS542, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151B The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (207SGS543).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (207SGS544), it moves to 207SGS549.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" at 207SGS541 (207SGS541; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (207SGS545). The number of the first special figure pending memory is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of 207SGS545, if the game control counter setting unit 207SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0" good. In this way, the processing of 207SGS545 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at 207SGS541, and whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" determine whether As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" in 207SGS545 (207SGS545; N), as the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A , the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out and specified (207SGS546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of 207SGS546, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value and updating it, etc., the 1st special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are subtracted by 1. Along with updating like this, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 207SG151A The indicated pending data is shifted upward by one entry (207SGS547).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (207SGS548), it moves to 207SGS549.

In 207SGS549, for example, the current game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 207SG152 (207SGS549). The CPU 103 specifies that it is in a variable probability state when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that it is in a short time state when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the short time flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

Following the process of 207SGS549, the CPU 103 refers to the top address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 11-14(B)) and specifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (207SGS550).

Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information stored in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 11-14(B)), and determines whether or not there is a determination used set value stored (207SGS551). If it is determined that the determined used set value is stored (207SGS551: Y), the set value specified in 207SGS550 is compared with the stored determined used set value (207SGS552), and the specified set value is the same as the stored determined used set value (207SGS553).

In 207SGS553, if it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored determination used setting value are not the same (207SGS553: N), an error designation command corresponding to the abnormality of the setting value to the effect control board 12 In addition to setting for transmission (207SGS554), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 (207SGS555), and a loop is performed. go into processing. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so that the pachinko gaming machine becomes unplayable (unplayable state) by the loop processing. The error designation command is transmitted by the CPU 103 executing command control processing.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment stores the set value (determined used set value) referred to when executing the previous variable display and the address currently stored in the top address of the RAM 102. When the set values are different, the management device of the game parlor can recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different. The security of the machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the loop processing and does not execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state. However, the CPU 103 performs processing such as restricting the shooting of game balls, and not performing the payout of prize balls or the variable display of special symbols even if the game balls to each winning opening win. By executing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a non-playable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 048AK, a difference between the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 is treated as an abnormality, and the abnormality is detected by the management device of the gaming facility. Although the recognizable form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, blinking the display monitor 207SG029, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, " E." may be displayed to inform the player, the store clerk of the game arcade, etc. of the abnormality.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characteristic portion 048AK, if the set value stored in the head address of the current RAM 102 is different from the determined used set value, the error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 and the game is played. Although the security signal is output only once to the field management device, the present invention is not limited to this. may be repeatedly executed at predetermined intervals in the above-described unplayable state.

In addition, in the special symbol normal processing of this characterizing portion 048AK, when the set value used for determination and the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a non-playable state. Although the form of control has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the top address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 controls the pachinko game It is not necessary to control the machine 1 to be in a non-playable state.

Furthermore, if the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be in a non-playable state when the determined used set value is different from the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102, for example, a game hall Only the output of the security signal to the management device may be executed, or the setting value stored at the top address of the RAM 102 may be reset and specified. When resetting the set value stored at the top address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored at the top address of the RAM 102, or the most unfavorable value for the player (this By setting 1) in the characterizing portion 048AK of the embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from becoming excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

When it is determined in 207SGS551 that the used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up with a cold start and executes the first variable display (207SGS551: N) or the set value specified in 207SGS553 If it is determined that the stored judgment used set value is the same (207SGS553: Y), select the special figure display result judgment table according to the current game state, the start mouth buffer value and the set value (207SGS556). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing executed in the variable display result determination module in 207SGS525 shown in FIG. 11-17A, that is, the processing of 207SGS571 to 207SGS577 shown in FIG. 11-19 is performed (207SGS557).

Subsequently, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variable display will result in a big hit at 207SGS557 (207SGS558), and if it is determined that it will not result in a big hit (207SGS558; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display will result in a small hit at 207SGS557. (207SGS559).

When it is determined at 207SGS558 that the variable display will result in a big hit (207SGS558; Y), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 is set to the ON state (207SGS561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and (B) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (207SGS562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" in the jackpot type determination table. (207SGS563).

By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 207SGS563, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is changed to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. Whether or not to control is determined before deriving a fixed special symbol as a variable display result. Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 207SG155 (207SGS564), the determined jackpot type Remember. For example, "1" to "6" may be set according to the jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot F".

On the other hand, when it is determined at 207SGS559 that it will be a small hit in the variable display (207SGS559; Y), it proceeds to 207SGS560 and sets the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section 207SG152 to ON state (207SGS560). .

On the other hand, if it is not determined at 207SGS559 that the variable display results in a small hit, that is, if the variable display results in a loss (207SGS559; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS565.

In 207SGS565, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is set), whether to control to the small hit game state (whether or not the big hit flag is set) A fixed special symbol is set corresponding to the prior determination result of , and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of setting the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when the special symbol display result is determined to be "big hit" at 207SGS558, for example, when the big hit type at 207SGS563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is determined. set to In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" at 207SGS559 (when the small hit flag is set at 207SGS560), the advance to the effect that the special figure display result is "small hit" Corresponding to the determination result, a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol at 207SGS565, the setting value specified at 207SGS553 is updated and stored in RAM 102 as the determined used setting value (207SGS566), and the value of the special figure process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process. (207SGS567), the special symbol normal process is terminated.

In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special game using the first special figure is "0" at 207SGS545 (207SGS545; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (207SGS568), the special symbol normal End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration specifying command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration specifying command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, since the judgment used setting value is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 11-14 (B)), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started. , the used setting value does not exist when the first variable display is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. By storing the value in the area of the RAM 102 that has not been cleared by the RAM clearing process, even when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by cold start, the used setting value and the RAM 102 can be determined when executing the first variable display. The set value (the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1) stored at the head address of the pachinko game machine 1 may be compared.

11-17 and 11-18, the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode of determining a variable display result using a variable display result determination module that executes common processing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the comparison process (207SGS551 to 207SGS553 shown in FIGS. 11-18) and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as a result of the process do not match the determined used set value, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the game stop state (207SGS554 to 207SGS555) and the like may be included. By doing so, even when executing the random value determination process at the time of winning, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the used determination set value, or the set value specified by the CPU 103 and the determination use value as the result of the process Since the process of controlling the pachinko game machine 1 to the game stop state can be executed when the set value does not match the finished set value, the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be further improved.

Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of processing (processing within the pre-reading notice setting processing) performed in the pre-reading notice setting processing in step S161 of FIG. In the processing within the pre-reading notice setting processing shown in FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 048AKS001). If no new start-up winning command is received (step 048AKS001; No), the pre-reading notice is not executed, so the processing within the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is a reception of a new starting winning command (step 048AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the pending display number corresponding to the newly received starting winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002), and the new If the pending display number corresponding to the received start winning command is "1" (step 048AKS002; Yes), the process within the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the reserved display number corresponding to the newly received start winning command is not "1" ("2" to "4") (step 048AKS002; No), the conditions for inhibiting execution of prefetching notice are established. (Step 048AKS003). The execution prohibition condition is a condition for prohibiting the execution of the pre-reading notice, and here, the prize-winning judgment result designation command included in the newly received starting prize-winning command designates "no judgment". When there is a judgment other than "non-reach" in the variable display executed before the target (check the contents of the command buffer at the time of starting winning, and the pending display number corresponding to the newly received command at the time of starting winning Each winning judgment result specification command of the pending display number before or when the newly received start winning command is the first start winning command, the second start winning command buffer It is a condition that is established when there is a command specifying a winning judgment result other than "non-reach" (judgment result of reach or higher) in the judgment result specification command. Note that the execution prohibition condition is also satisfied when it has already been decided to execute the look-ahead chance number in the variable display performed before the target (when the look-ahead chance number flag, which will be described later, is on). As a result, it is possible to prevent confusion of the player by preventing the execution of the look-ahead chance number for a plurality of targets. In addition to this, the look-ahead chance may be executed when the target is reach or higher. Note that executing the look-ahead chance number means executing the look-ahead forewarning effect by displaying the look-ahead chance number.

If the condition for inhibiting execution of the prefetching notice is satisfied (step 048AKS003; Yes), the processing within the prefetching notice setting processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the condition for prohibiting execution of the prefetching notice is not satisfied (step 048AKS003; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching chance (step 048AKS004). Specifically, at step 048AKS004, it is determined whether or not to execute a look-ahead chance number according to the determination result at the time of winning, and the type of look-ahead chance number if executed, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21. In the characteristic part 048AK, as shown in FIG. 11-21, one of "no execution", "prefetching chance A", and "prefetching chance B" is determined by the determination ratio shown. In addition, the look-ahead chance is an effect executed as a look-ahead notice, and the variable display of the decoration pattern executed before the target (if multiple variable displays are performed, each of the multiple variable displays). As a result, it is an effect of deriving and displaying a predetermined chance number (a non-reach chance number when the variable display does not establish a reach).

In the characteristic portion 048AK, two kinds of prefetching chance numbers are prepared, one of which is "prefetching chance number A" and the other is "prefetching chance number B". “Prefetching Chance A” and “Prefetching Chance B” differ in the degree of expectation for the target to hit the jackpot, and the chance to stop is different (as shown in FIG. 11-21, “234” A predetermined chance is stopped, and in the look-ahead chance B, the predetermined chance of "345" is stopped.). It should be noted that when the chance eye is stopped, the decorative pattern may be illuminated. In this case, the "prefetching chance eye A" and the "prefetching chance eye B" are distinguished by emitting light of different colors. You may make it As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when "prefetching chance number B" is executed than when "prefetching chance number A" is executed.

In addition to this, for example, the determination ratio of the display result to be derived and displayed as the look-ahead chance may be changed according to the set value. For example, when forming a look-ahead chance eye with a combination of odd decorative symbols such as 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, only when the set value is "6", the combination of "315" (best) is a look-ahead chance. It may be derived and displayed as an eye. Also, for example, when the setting is low, the rate at which a combination in which the middle symbol and the right symbol have the same number is derived and displayed, such as "133", "155", "377", etc., as a look-ahead chance. (In addition, since the middle symbol and the right symbol are the same number for the predetermined display to be described later, in that case, either one of them is designated as the middle symbol so that the look-ahead chance eye and the predetermined display can be distinguished. If the left and middle symbols have the same number instead of the right symbol), if the setting is high, the same numbers such as ``135'', ``357'', and ``379'' will be used as the look-ahead chances. It is also possible to increase the percentage of derived and displayed combinations of so-called loose stitches that do not include numbers. That is, the setting value may be suggested by the type of the read-ahead chance number that is derived and displayed (the look-ahead chance number may include the setting suggestion effect).

Returning to FIG. 11-20, after executing the process of step 048AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the look-ahead chance eye (step 048AKS005). If the look-ahead chance number is not executed (step 048AKS005; No), the processing within the look-ahead notice setting processing is terminated. If the look-ahead chance number is to be executed (step 048AKS005; Yes), the look-ahead chance number flag indicating that the look-ahead chance number is to be executed is set to the ON state (step 048AKS006), and then the processing within the look-ahead notice setting processing is terminated. . Note that the read-ahead chance flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 .

In addition, for example, in order for the player to be able to visually recognize which target is the target of the prefetching chance, a pending display notice effect is performed for the suspension of the target of the prefetching chance, and the target of the prefetching chance is displayed. The display mode of the hold display may be changed to a mode different from the normal mode. That is, when executing the look-ahead chance number, the pending display notice effect may be executed together. In addition, the pending display notice may be executed separately from the look-ahead chance.

FIG. 11-22 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing executed in the characterizing portion 048AK. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. ” (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "losing" (step S521; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11, the specified variation pattern determines whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" (step S522).

If it is determined in step S522 that it is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the combination of final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination includes a look-ahead chance, a predetermined display, and the like. It is determined by the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process (step 048AKS010) which display other than the above is to be derived and displayed.

FIG. 11-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process executed in step 048AKS010 of FIG. 11-22. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead chance flag is set to ON (step 048AKS011). If the look-ahead chance flag is on (step 048AKS011; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 will determine the kind of look-ahead chance eye (if it is a look-ahead chance eye A, the corresponding "234 ", and if it is the look-ahead chance B, the corresponding "345" decoration symbol is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS012).

After executing the processing of step 048AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the variation immediately before the target variation of the look-ahead chance (the variation immediately before the target) (step 048AKS013). If it is not the change immediately before the target, the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the change is immediately before the target (step 048AKS013; Yes), the look-ahead chance flag is cleared to an off state so that the look-ahead chance is not derived and displayed in the target change (step 048AKS014). Reach loss stop design etc. decision processing is ended. In addition, for example, if the look-ahead chance number is executed only when the target fluctuation is greater than or equal to the reach (if the target fluctuation is a non-reach fluctuation, the look-ahead chance number is not executed), the target The look-ahead chance second flag may be cleared to the off state at the end of the fluctuation of . In this way, the look-ahead chance number is continuously displayed from when the look-ahead chance number flag is set to the ON state to the variation immediately before the target variation. In addition, a plurality of variations for displaying the look-ahead chance number are prepared in advance as patterns (for example, if the target variation is the fourth variation and the target is moved three times, the first and third look-ahead chance For example, a pattern of displaying eyes, a pattern of displaying second and third chances, etc.), it is also possible to display prefetching chances according to the pattern.

At step 048AKS011, when the look-ahead chance flag is off (step 048AKS011; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes predetermined display determination processing (step 048AKS015). In the characteristic part 048AK, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative patterns among the determined decorative patterns of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different ratio according to the set value, thereby suggesting the setting value. Perform setting suggestion production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-26, setting suggesting effects are performed by displaying fixed decorative symbols of non-reach combinations of types A to C at different ratios according to set values. Further, in the characteristic portion 048AK, the predetermined display is performed in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

FIG. 11-24 is a flow chart showing an example of the predetermined display determination process performed in step 048AKS015 of FIG. In the predetermined display determination process shown in FIG. 11-24, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable probability control is in progress (step 048AKS041). Whether or not the variable probability control is in progress may be determined, for example, by reading the EXT data in the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like. If the variable probability control is not in progress (step 048AKS041; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, if variable probability control is in progress (step 048AKS041; Yes), it is determined whether or not the previous flag is on (step 048AKS042). The previous flag is a flag indicating whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the variation (previous variation) immediately before the variation for which the predetermined display was to be displayed or not, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. is provided.

If the previous flag is ON, that is, if the predetermined display is displayed in the previous variation (step 048AKS042; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the predetermined display determination process. On the other hand, if the previous flag is off (step 048AKS042; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the predetermined display is displayed, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion effect for displaying the predetermined display is executed, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-25. It is determined (step 048AKS043), and the predetermined display determination processing is terminated. In this way, in the characteristic portion 048AK, when the predetermined display was displayed in the previous variation, the predetermined display is not displayed, thereby preventing the predetermined display from being displayed continuously. On the other hand, the look-ahead chance eye, which is an effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit, is displayed continuously with a plurality of variations as described above, so whether it is an effect that suggests the expectation of a big hit or a setting that suggests a set value It is made easy for the player to recognize whether it is a suggestive effect and prevented from being confused with the look-ahead chance due to the continuous display of the predetermined display. In this example, an example is shown in which it is determined whether or not the predetermined display was displayed in the previous variation. , may be restricted so that the predetermined display is not displayed if it is three times. Furthermore, the number of times the predetermined display is displayed continuously may differ according to the set value. According to this, the variations of the production are increased and the amusement of the game can be improved. Hereinafter, executing the setting suggestion effect by displaying the predetermined display is simply referred to as executing the predetermined display.

FIG. 11-25 is a diagram showing determination ratios for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined display. As shown in the figure, in the characterizing portion 048AK, it is determined whether or not the player is in a so-called consecutive game state, i.e., whether or not a consecutive game flag is on (whether or not a consecutive game flag, which will be described later), that is, whether or not it is the first big hit. Accordingly, the ratio of determination to execute the predetermined display is different. In the illustrated example, the determination ratio is set so that the predetermined display is not executed when the user is staying in the house for a long time. According to this, it is possible to prevent a set value from being easily guessed by execution of a predetermined display in a so-called consecutive house state, and to attract the player's attention after the end of the first big win. It should be noted that the predetermined display may be performed at a small rate, such as 2%, even during the continuous residence.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the process of step 048AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the predetermined display, that is, whether or not there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016). If there is a predetermined display (step 048AKS016; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of predetermined display to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-26 (step 048AKS017).

FIG. 11-26 is a diagram showing determination ratios for determining the type of predetermined display to be performed. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 048AK, predetermined displays of types A to C are prepared in advance, and the combination of decorative patterns "344" is derived and displayed for type A, and the decorative pattern "399" for type B. are derived and displayed, and for the type C, a combination of decorative symbols of "577" is derived and displayed. Then, it is suggested that the high setting is in the order of type A<type B<type C. FIG. Note that this example shows an example that suggests which setting value is, but for example, the setting value has been changed, the setting value is an odd or even number, and the minimum setting of "1" is shown. As long as it is a suggestion about a set value, such as not being a value, the suggested content may be different. Further, there may be a type of predetermined display that is displayed only when the set value is set to high. The high setting may be, for example, the upper half setting values such as 4 to 6 out of 1 to 6, or the upper two setting values such as 5 and 6. Setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, is referred to as the highest setting value.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the processing of step 048AKS017, the effect control CPU 120 determines the predetermined display of the type determined in step 048AKS017 (determined combination of decorative symbols) as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS018). Subsequently, the previous flag is set to the on state (step 048AKS019), and after adding 1 to the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display (step 048AKS020), the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination processing is terminated. The count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is the count value provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the predetermined display of type A to type C is displayed during the variable probability state (limited to cases where the state is not continuous). It is for counting the number of times displayed. At step 048AKS020, 1 is added to the count value corresponding to the predetermined display of the type determined as the final stop symbol. The count value is referred to in the final variation effect setting process (see FIG. 11-27) to be described later, displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-28(f), and then cleared.

If it is determined that there is no predetermined display in step 048AKS016 of FIG. 11-23 (step 048AKS016; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols that are predetermined display and look-ahead chance eyes (other than predetermined display etc.) The reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol (step 048AKS021). As an example, in the process of step 048AKS021, first, numerical data representing a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined left finalized symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., the left confirmed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decoration symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decoration symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right finalized symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the right confirmed decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined. It should be noted that, in order to prevent the combination of the decoration patterns that are the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye in advance, even if the decoration design that constitutes the predetermined display and the look-ahead chance eye (predetermined display, etc.) is not selected from each fixed design determination table. Alternatively, when the combination of decorative patterns is determined, if the combination of decorative patterns matches a predetermined display or the like, the lottery may be drawn again. In addition, in the process of step 048AKS021, for example, when it is not in the variable probability state, the combination of the same decorative symbols as the predetermined display is displayed at a lower rate than in the case of the special state, regardless of the set value. It can be.

After executing the process of step 048AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 clears the previous flag to the OFF state (step 048AKS022), and then ends the non-reach-losing stop symbol determination process. In this way, when the pre-reading chance number is to be executed, the pre-reading chance number is given priority over the predetermined display. The look-ahead chance eye is executed regardless of whether it is in the variable probability state or not, whereas the predetermined display is under control in the variable probability state and is executed only after the first big hit game state is completed (that is, (Not executed in Renso state). Further, while the look-ahead chance number is continuously displayed with a plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined display is not continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention during the variable probability state, to make it easier for the player to recognize whether it is a look-ahead chance or a predetermined display, and to improve interest. In addition, even when displaying a look-ahead chance number, priority may be given to the predetermined display in the case of the variable probability state. In this case, if the final stop symbol after the predetermined display is displayed is used as the look-ahead chance, the player may be confused. May restrict eye execution. Specifically, the execution of the look-ahead chance may be restricted until the predetermined display is displayed five times. Further, the execution of the look-ahead chance may be restricted from the time when the predetermined display is displayed five times to the end of three fluctuations. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the display of the look-ahead chance following the display of the predetermined display. In addition, the continuous game state is changed to the continuous game state (the continuous game flag is set to ON state) when the game is once again controlled to the jackpot game state and then becomes a big hit again during the variable probability state after the end. In addition, after entering the continuous state, it will not become a big hit again, and the probability variation control will be performed a predetermined number of times, and the game will end (the continuous state flag will be cleared to the off state).

Returning to FIG. 11-22, when it is determined that it is not a non-reach variation pattern in step S522 (step S522; No), the final stop symbol that constitutes the reach combination is determined. step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining left/right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in RAM 122 is extracted, and predetermined left/right determined symbols stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like are extracted. By referring to the pattern determination table, etc., the pattern numbers of the determined decorative patterns stopped and displayed together in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are the same. Determine the decoration pattern of Furthermore, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, and referring to a predetermined medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121, etc. , among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the middle fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not "losing" (step S521; No), the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "definite" (for big hit C or big hit F Yes), or if the special figure display result is "small hit", it is determined whether it is a case other than these (step S525). When it is determined that it is a "definite hit" or a "small hit" (step S525; Yes), for example, a final stop pattern corresponding to the case of "definite hit" or the case of a "small hit", such as an opening chance eye. A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). As an example, when any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it is determined to be the final stop symbol that constitutes one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the chance number to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Then, it is sufficient to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that form one of the opening chances.

After executing any of the processes of step 048AKS010, step S524, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the final variation in the probability variation state (step 048AKS031). In step 048AKS031, for example, when probability variation control is performed in 100 variations after the end of the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to the probability variation state and it is the 100th variation. If it is the final variation (step 048AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs final variation effect setting processing (step 048AKS032).

FIG. 11-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the final variation effect setting process performed in step 048AKS032 of FIG. 11-22. The final variation effect setting process is a process performed when the probability variation state ends without becoming a big hit. In the final variation effect setting process, a setting is made so that the frequency of the displayed predetermined display is visibly displayed to the player for each type, or a setting is made so that the player can visibly display the number of balls won during the consecutive games. will be In the final variable effect setting process shown in FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the continuous house flag is set to ON state, that is, whether or not the continuous house is in progress (step 048AKS051).

If it is not in the continuous house, that is, if the continuous house flag is off (step 048AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 is set to display each value of the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display (for each type count value display setting) is performed (step 048AKS052). At step 048AKS052, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(f), settings are made to display the frequency of appearance of types A to C by bar graphs. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 clears each value of the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display to 0, and if the previous flag is ON, clears it to the OFF state, and sets the acquired ball count value to 0. (step 048AKS053), the final variation effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined at step 048AKS051 that the consecutive game is being played, that is, if the consecutive game flag is ON (step 048AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of balls obtained during the consecutive game. (step 048AKS054). It should be noted that the number of balls won during the consecutive game (acquired balls) is counted by being controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the game is not played consecutively, it is cleared by the above-mentioned step 048AKS053, and the game is cleared. If so, it is cleared at step 048AKS056 to be described later. In other words, it is sufficient that the number of balls won in the jackpot game state is continuously counted during the period from when the consecutive flag is turned on until it is turned off.

After executing the process of step 048AKS054, the effect control CPU 120 clears the continuous flag to the OFF state (step 048AKS055), and proceeds to the process of step 048AKS053 described above.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, when it is determined at step S525 that it is anything other than "positive hit" or "minor hit" (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E) (step S525; No), A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is determined (step S526). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determination of the finalized jackpot pattern updated by a random counter or the like in the RAM 122 is extracted. By referring to the decision table, etc., the symbol numbers stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are the same. Decide on a decoration pattern. At this time, depending on whether the big win type is big win A, big win B, big win D, or big win E, a different decorative pattern may be determined to be a fixed decorative pattern.

After executing either the process of step S526 or the process of step 048AKS032, or when it is determined that it is not the final variation in the probability variable state at step 048AKS031 (step 048AKS031; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets other effect execution settings (step S530). For example, at the start of the variable display or at a predetermined timing during the execution, the speakers 8L and 8R output a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.), and a game effect. By executing a predetermined aspect including part or all of the aspects in which a flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines, it is immediately announced (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit". ) may be executed in a one-shot notification mode. Alternatively, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result becoming a "big hit" may be executed as the notice effect during fluctuation.

As another example, in the process of step S530, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", for example, a setting may be made to execute a predetermined mode of presentation for liveliness. More specifically, it suffices if a predetermined mode of effect can be executed, such as a mode in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up, or a mode in which a predetermined effect image of a mini character is displayed.

After that, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S531). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation time performance control patterns corresponding to, for example, a variation pattern specified by a variation pattern specification command, and sets it as a use pattern. After executing the process of step S531, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, for example (step S532). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern etc. in the image display device 5 is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S532 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S534), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 11-28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a predetermined display or count value display for each type is performed. The illustrated example shows an example in which the predetermined display of type A is executed instead of the continuous residence. Moreover, it is a variable probability state, and variable probability control is performed until variation is performed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state. Fluctuation is initiated as shown in FIG. 11-28(a). It should be noted that FIG. 11-28(a) is assumed to be the 99th variation after the end of the jackpot game state. If it is determined to execute the predetermined display in the variation and the type is type A, as shown in FIG. The combination of decorative patterns that have been displayed) is derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (c), the 100th variation, that is, the final variation in the probability variation state is started, and as shown in FIG. A combination of decorative patterns determined by the method) is derived and displayed. This ends the definite variable state. It should be noted that when the probability variation state ends, after the end of the final variation, a message display indicating that as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-28(f), the count value for each type set in the processing of step 048AKS052 in FIG. mode.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Regardless, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as the common numerical range of the big hit determination values. Then, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6 (if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 1), from 1238 according to each setting value The range up to the value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. That is, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 2 to 6, the hit determination value 1020 is set as the big hit reference value, and the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are Since it is set so as to have a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, the value of the random number MR1 is set to a non-common numerical range from 1020 according to each set value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to an advantageous state can be reduced.

Especially in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, since the numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to one place with 1020 as the reference value within the range of 0 to 65535, the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value is plural. Compared to the case where it is provided, it is not necessary to execute the judgment of whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control to the jackpot game state) more than once. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to perform control in an advantageous state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is a normal state, a time-saving state, or a variable probability state, the above-described hit determination value With 1020 as the jackpot reference value, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values are set to be continuous numerical ranges. , Whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or time saving state, and from 1020 to the non-common numerical range according to the variable state Since it suffices to determine whether or not it is within the range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 should control to the big hit game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11, in the display result determination table, the numerical value of the small hit determination value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure The number of determination values included in the range is different (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the first special figure display result determination table is 328, whereas the second special figure display result The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the judgment table is 655, which is about twice). is set. Therefore, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hit gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special figure It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small winning game state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko game machine 1 regardless of the setting value set to the pachinko game machine 1. Since it is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the big hit when the set value is 6, whether it is controlled to the big hit game state When determining whether or not, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each setting value, and the small winning game state is controlled. When judging whether or not, it may be judged whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the fluctuation special figure, so the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control to the big hit game state and the processing load of determining whether to control to the small hit game state.

Also, the RAM 102 in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment can store the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-18, the CPU 103 in the characterizing portion 048AK of the present embodiment stores in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). Along with reading out the setting value, set the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value corresponding to the read setting value (set the display result determination table according to the set value), and enter the big hit game state It is determined whether or not to control. In other words, the CPU 103 reads the set values from the RAM 102 each time variable display is executed, and sets the display result determination table according to the read set values. It is possible to prevent the display result from being judged.

Note that the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which a setting value is read from the RAM 102 each time variable display is executed, and a display result determination table is set according to the read setting value. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CPU 103 may read setting values from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, and set a display result determination table according to the read setting values. . When the display result determination table is set according to the setting values read from the RAM 102 when the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the setting is performed during the period until the power failure occurs in the pachinko game machine 1. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

Further, the CPU 103 reads out the set values stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and stores the read set values and the previous variable display result. The setting value read out from the RAM 102 (determination used setting value) is compared with the setting value read out from the RAM 102 for determination. Since the error notification is performed by the image displayed on the display device 5, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined due to the reading of an inappropriate setting value. Furthermore, not only can it be possible to more accurately identify that an inappropriate set value is set in the RAM 102, but it is also possible to make people around the gaming machine recognize that the set value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. As a result, game parlor staff and the like can quickly deal with abnormal set values.

In addition, in the characterizing part 048AK of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 is compared with the determined used set value each time the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be set based on the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the elapse of a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the CPU 103 compares the set value read from the RAM 102 with the previously used set value, and if the set value read from the RAM 102 this time and the determined used set value do not match as a result of the comparison, the effect An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the notification image 207SG005M4 on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103. It is possible to more reliably prevent an inappropriate variable display result from being determined by reading.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 to 11-19, the CPU 103 uses a common variable display result determination module when executing the winning random number value determination and when performing the special symbol normal processing. Since the display result is determined, a part of the processing can be shared between the execution of the winning random number value determination and the execution of the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. Although the numerical range of the judgment value is the same, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit judgment value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the setting value read from the RAM 102 corresponding display result determination table is set), so the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state. When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102, the processing for setting the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is shared. Therefore, the capacity of the processing program can also be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11, when 1 (setting value with the lowest jackpot probability) is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, it is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot game state by targeting only the common numerical range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Therefore, the CPU 103 can reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values. That is, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set so as to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical range of the big-hit determination value.

Further, in the characteristic part 048AK of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical range of the small hit determination value.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK, during control to the probability variable state, as a predetermined display, a combination of some decorative patterns among the fixed decorative patterns of the non-reach combination is displayed at a different rate according to the set value. do. In addition to the predetermined display, the look-ahead chance eye composed of fixed decorative symbols of non-ready combination is also displayed as a variable display result, so that the variation of performance can be increased and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, the pre-reading chance number may also be displayed at different ratios according to the set values. According to this, which set value is set is suggested by the result of the variable display during control to the variable probability state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the variable probability state is obtained by executing a special game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big win game state, or by entering a big win game state before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. finish. That is, when the big hit gaming state is not entered again, the variable probability state continues at least until the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, even if the game is controlled to the variable probability state and returned to the normal state without being controlled to the jackpot game state again, the display of the predetermined display can prevent a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, in the characteristic portion 048AK, different types of predetermined displays are displayed at different ratios according to the set values for the types A to C of the predetermined displays. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which type of predetermined display is displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK, the determined decoration symbols of the non-reach combination forming the look-ahead chance eye are a combination of symbols different from the determined decoration symbols of the non-reach combination forming the predetermined display. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate between the look-ahead effect and the setting suggesting effect, and prevent confusion with the advance notice effect of the degree of expectation of a big hit. Furthermore, while the look-ahead chance number can be displayed continuously over a plurality of variations, the predetermined display is restricted so as not to be displayed continuously. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the user from being confused with the pre-reading notice exercise due to the continuous display of the predetermined display.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 048AK, after being controlled to the variable probability state, at the timing of being controlled to the normal state, by displaying a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display, the frequency of the predetermined display is displayed in the game. be recognizable by a person. According to this, the player can confirm the frequency with which the predetermined result is displayed, and can easily predict the setting value. In addition, the display of the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display is performed when the consecutive flag is off, that is, at the timing when the normal state is reached without becoming a big hit again after being once controlled to the variable probability state. only performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being easily guessed by displaying the count value during the continuous residence. On the other hand, in the case of the consecutive game, instead of displaying the count value provided according to the type of the predetermined display, the number of balls played during the game is displayed at the timing when the normal state is reached. . According to this, the obtained balls during the consecutive game are displayed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Modified example of characteristic part 048AK)
In the characteristic portion 048AK, as shown in FIGS. Although provided in a different range that is not continuous with the numerical range, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification, as shown in FIGS. 11-29 (A) and 11-29 (B), the game The numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be continuously provided regardless of the state or set value.

In addition, if the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the increase in the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. , and the common numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is the reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Further, when the set value is 3, the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1237), and the small hit determination value The common numerical range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

When the game state is a variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical range of the big hit determination value is set to 1020 to 1346, and the small hit determination The common numerical range of values is shifted by the amount that the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value increased from the normal state or the time saving state, and 1347 to 1674 (1347 is the small hit judgment value standard value). Also, if the set value is 2, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Also, if the set value is 3, set the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346), and set the small hit judgment value The common numerical range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value. Henceforth, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

In addition, as a form in which the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) are set continuously in this way, as shown in FIG. 11-30, Set the numerical range of the small hit judgment value to the range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the rear end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the big hit judgment value so that it is continuous with the numerical range of the small hit judgment value A common numerical range (64990 to 65207) may be set. Furthermore, in this case, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is set so as to be continuous with the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values is varied according to the set value. It is sufficient to vary the jackpot probability according to the set value.

When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. is the minimum value of the jackpot judgment value (in the example shown in FIG. 11-30, 64990 for set value 1, 64974 for set value 2, and 64954 for set value 3). When it is determined that the value of the numerical value MR1 is greater than or equal to the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is further varied by determining whether or not the random number MR1 is greater than or equal to 65208 which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is only necessary to determine whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit. By judging the variable display in this way, the variable display result is judged without executing both the judgment of whether the variable display result is a big hit or the judgment of whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining the result of variable display can be reduced.

As described above, in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-30, the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value (when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, Common numerical range and common numerical range of small hit judgment value, If 2 to 6 are set as set values in pachinko machine 1, common numerical range of big hit judgment value and non-common numerical range and small hit judgment value Common numerical value range) is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit determination value, and the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the big hit determination regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 It is set to include the same number of judgment values in a continuous range from the numerical range of values. For this reason, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number MR1 is within the range between 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. It can be determined whether to control to Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big win game state or the small win game state, the big win game is played by judging whether or not the random number MR1 is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small win determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control to either the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the processing load to determine whether to control to the big hitting game state and the determination of whether to control to the small hitting game state It is possible to reduce the processing load for performing

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-29, when the game state is controlled to the probability variable state by the CPU 103, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the jackpot reference value, and the increased jackpot determination value Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the numerical range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control to the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of the big hit determination value increases, and the small hit game state Since it is sufficient to determine whether to control, the processing load for determining whether to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and the processing load for determining whether to control to the small hit game state are reduced. be able to.

11-29 and 11-30, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set. Since the CPU 103 may determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value, the CPU 103 reduces the processing load of determining whether to control to the big win game state. can do.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-29 and 11-30, the form in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set so as to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is exemplified, but the present invention is this However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In addition, in the characterizing section 048AK of the above-described embodiment, an example was exemplified in which the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the As shown in 11-31 and FIG. 11-32, the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination values may be set to different numerical ranges.

When the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value are set to different numerical ranges in this way, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the numerical range of the small hit determination value ( The common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is a numerical range different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the non-common numerical range when the set value of the big hit judgment value is 6 (judgment included in the non-common numerical range In a numerical range different from the numerical range with the highest number of values), a numerical range that is continuous from the reference value of the small hit judgment value (32767 to 33094 in Figure 11-31, 32767 to 33421 in Figure 11-32, in any case The reference value of the small hit determination value may be set to 32767).

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, while the reference value of the small hit judgment value is common according to the variation special figure, the judgment value included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value Although the form with different numbers is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same as.

As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set in the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. there is In addition, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2 to 6, a numerical value different from the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range according to the setting value with 60000 as the standard value (60000 to 60016 for setting value 2, 60000 to 60035 for setting value 3 ... 60000 to 60109 for setting value 6) is a big hit It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value according to the change of the set value. load can be reduced. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the big hit game state by the CPU 103 and to determine whether or not to control to the small hit game state.

In particular, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot game state with 60000, which is the same value regardless of the setting value, as the reference value for the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the game state.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, as with the characteristic portion 048AK described above, when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is not set, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control to the big hit game state by targeting only the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The processing load to be performed can be reduced.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical range of the small hit judgment value) is the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value And in a numerical range different from the non-common numerical range, it is set to be a continuous numerical range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, the CPU 103 is the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. Since it can be determined whether or not to control to the small winning game state with 32767 as the small winning reference value, the processing load of determining whether to control to the small winning game state of the CPU 103 can be reduced.

In the forms shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set, while the pachinko game When 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko machine 1, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is not set, and when a value of 2 or more is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, each set value is set. Although the form of setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. A common numerical range may be established. Incidentally, even when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko game machine 1 in this way, when setting the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, for example, the same reference as in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32 A range from 1238, which is a value, to a value corresponding to each set value may be set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. Then, the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to be the smallest when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko game machine 1, and the jackpot determination value increases as the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 increases. By expanding the non-common numerical value range of , the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state may be varied according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Furthermore, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, if the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value On the other hand, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. That is, since the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range based on the same value although the number of determination values included is different according to the variation special figure, the CPU 103 determines that the variation special figure is the second Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the small winning game state by using the same value 32767 as the reference value in the case of the 1 special figure and the case of the 2nd special figure, whether to control to the small winning game state by the CPU 103 It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not.

In addition, in the form shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical range, but the present invention It is not limited to this, and the reference value of the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical range.

In addition, in the characteristic part 048AK of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical range of the big hit determination value or non-common It is determined whether or not to control to a big winning game state based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range, and whether or not the value of the random number MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small winning determination value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be determined whether to control to a small hit game state or not. For example, a calculation may be performed on the value of the random number MR1, and it may be determined whether or not to control to the big win game state or the small win game state based on the value of the calculation result. Furthermore, a calculation is performed on the value of the random number MR1, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535, which is the maximum value of the hit determination value). You may judge whether to control to a state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the variable probability control is always performed after the end of the jackpot game state, and the special figure game of a predetermined number of times (100 times) is finished, or the next jackpot game state is started. , Although an example that continues until one of the end conditions is satisfied first is shown, for example, the variable probability control may continue until the next big hit game state is started (predetermined number of times (100 times ) It is not necessary to set the end condition of the variable probability control to the end of the special game). In such a case, a jackpot type (non-probability variable jackpot type) that is not controlled to a probability variable state after the end of the big win game state is prepared, and a special game is finished a predetermined number of times after the end of the non-probability variable jackpot game state. The associative state should just end at the timing when the time saving control controlled to ends. In such a gaming machine, it may be possible to display a predetermined display not only in the variable probability state but also during control in the time saving state.

In addition, in such a gaming machine, although the variable probability state continues until the next big hit game state is started, it may take a long time before the variable display result becomes a big hit (so-called continuous game) hooked state). Therefore, for example, when the number of winning game balls in the variable winning ball device 6B reaches a predetermined number or more, it is determined that the game ball has entered into a state of addiction during consecutive games, and a setting suggestion effect is performed according to the set value. good too. Also, a shooting sensor may be provided, and when the number of shots of game balls exceeds a predetermined number, it may be determined that the game has entered a state of addiction during a series of games, and a setting suggesting effect may be performed according to the set value. Furthermore, an out-sensor is provided at an out-hole into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning holes are taken in, and when the number of out-balls reaches a predetermined number or more, it is determined that the player has fallen into a state of addiction during a series of games. , setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the setting value. According to this, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in a so-called addicted state during a long game, and to promote the shooting. It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect may be performed, for example, by outputting a sound, displaying a specific character, or performing both depending on the set value.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (e), after the message indicating the end of ST mode, which is a variable probability state, is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (f), the predetermined display as it is Although the count values provided according to the types of are shown as graphs for each type, this is just an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(e), after a message indicating the end of the ST mode, which is a variable probability state, is displayed, prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (for example, display a message such as pressing the button) , button images, etc.), based on the fact that the push sensor 35B detects the action of the player with respect to the push button 31B, a count value provided according to the type of predetermined display may be displayed. good. According to this, an effect can be executed according to the taste of the player. It should be noted that when no action by the player is detected, the count value provided according to the type of predetermined display may not be displayed.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 049AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 049AK of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 049AK, as in the characteristic portion 048AK, once the jackpot hits, 100% probability variation control is performed after the jackpot game state ends. shall be That is, as with the characteristic portion 048AK, as the jackpot types, jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" shown in FIGS. 11-12 are prepared. In addition, in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 049AK, either the first special figure and the second special figure, or both, after the end of the jackpot game state only time-saving control is executed to shift to the low probability high base state A jackpot type G (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) or a jackpot type of a jackpot H in which variable probability control continues until the next big win (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is over. In addition, in the characteristic part 049AK, when the game state is the normal state, the effect state internally provided for performing the lottery regarding the execution of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to one of a plurality of types of effect modes. . The production mode in the characteristic part 049AK is, for example, a background image that is displayed differently depending on the production mode being controlled so that the player can visually recognize which production mode is being controlled, an output sound, a lamp, etc. It is not possible for the player to recognize which production mode is being controlled because the lighting pattern of the is different depending on the production mode being controlled, and it is a common aspect in any production mode, and the player is an unrecognizable internal state. In addition, in the characteristic portion 049AK in this embodiment, it is controlled to one of the plurality of production modes as the production state only when the game state is the normal state, and it is not controlled to any production mode in the variable probability state. ing.

FIG. 12-1(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the production mode determination process executed by the characteristic portion 049AK. The production mode determination process is a process for determining the production mode to be controlled (shifted) when the next normal state is controlled (processing for determining the production mode in the next normal state), and step S173 in FIG. It is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is reception of an effect control command that specifies to start a big hit game state in the special figure per waiting process. The effect mode means a state of effect, and three types of effect modes such as mode A, mode B, and mode C are prepared in the characteristic part 049AK. In the characteristic part 049AK, even when the common setting suggestion effect is performed, the suggested contents are different depending on which effect mode is controlled. Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which effect mode is being controlled.

When the effect mode determination process shown in FIG. 12-1(A) is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current game state is the normal state (049AKS001). If it is in the normal state (step 049AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the current effect mode by checking the effect mode storage buffer shown in FIG. 12-1(B) (step 049AKS002). The effect mode storage buffer is a buffer for storing the current effect mode and the next effect mode, which are stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and in the initial state, "mode A" is stored as the current effect mode. ing.

After executing the processing of step 049AKS002, the production control CPU 120 determines the production mode (next production mode) in the next normal state according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. ), it is stored as the next performance mode in the performance mode storage buffer shown in FIG. 12-1(B). Specifically, when the current production mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode A", according to the set value, the next production mode according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-2 (A) to decide. Further, when the specified current production mode is "mode B", the next production mode is determined according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-2(B) according to the set value. When the specified current production mode is "mode C", the next production mode is determined according to the determined ratio shown in FIG. 12-2(C) according to the set value.

In the characteristic portion 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A. In the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. 12-2(A), the higher the set value is even and the higher the set value (set value “4” or “6”), the more “mode A” is set. The determination ratio is set so as to make it easier to shift to "mode C". Further, in the characterizing part 049AK, as shown in FIG. 12B, the determination ratio is set so that the transition from "mode B" to "mode A" is not performed. Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. 12-2(C), as the set value of even number and the highest set value (set value “6”) are set, “mode C” changes to “mode The decision ratio is set so that it is easy to shift to B'.

Returning to FIG. 12-1 (A), after executing the process of step 049AKS003, or when it is determined that it is not in a normal state (probability variable state) in step 049AKS001 (step 049AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 Terminate the production mode determination process. It should be noted that, in the case of the probability variable state, the production mode determination process is ended as it is because the production mode for the next normal state has already been decided at the timing when the normal state becomes a big hit (at the time of the first big hit in the continuous state). This is because it is stored in the performance mode storage buffer.

FIG. 12-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting suggestion rendering process executed by the characteristic portion 049AK. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process of step S177 of FIG. 7, and is a process of executing a setting suggestion effect as the ending effect. In the characteristic part 049AK, as described above, the ratio of execution of the setting suggesting effect is different depending on which effect mode is being controlled, and even when the common setting suggesting effect is performed, The suggested contents differ depending on which production mode is controlled. When the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. 12-3 is started, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the current effect mode (step 049AKS011). For example, if the current production mode is "mode A" and the next production mode is "mode C", then in step 049AKS011, "mode A" is specified as the current production mode.

After executing the process of step 049AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect according to the determined ratio shown in FIG. 12-4 according to the specified effect mode. In the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. 12-4, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A. Returning to FIG. 12-3, after executing the process of step 049AKS012, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect, that is, whether or not the setting suggesting effect is to be executed (step 049AKS013). If the setting suggestion effect is not executed (step 049AKS013; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion effect process as it is.

On the other hand, if the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, that is, if there is execution (step 049AKS013; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the setting suggestion execution tables shown in FIGS. setting suggestion execution table is set according to the effect mode specified in step 049AKS011, and the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed is determined according to the set value (step 049AKS014).

FIGS. 12-5(A) to 12-5(C) are diagrams showing configuration examples of setting suggestion execution tables. As shown in the figure, in the characterizing portion 049AK, the setting suggesting effect is executed by lighting the lamp provided on the game board 2 in any one of "white", "blue" and "red". Note that the lamp includes an LED. FIG. 12-5(A) is a setting suggestion execution table that is set when the current presentation mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode A". As shown in the figure, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-5(A) sets the decision ratio so as to suggest that the high setting is made when the "red" lighting is performed. FIG. 12-5(B) is a setting suggestion execution table that is set when the current presentation mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "mode B". As shown, in the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-5(B), when "white" lighting is performed, odd setting values are set at a high rate, and "blue" lighting is performed. is set to indicate that the even set value is set to a high percentage when the light is on, and the decision percentage is set to suggest a high setting when the "red" lighting is performed. FIG. 12-5(C) is a setting suggestion execution table that is set when the current presentation mode specified in step 049AKS002 is "Mode C". As shown in the figure, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-5(C) definitely notifies that the set value is an odd number when "white" is lit, and "blue" is lit. Determination percentage is set to deterministically signal that even set point is set if flashing occurs and to suggest high setting if red flashing occurs It is That is, in the characteristic part 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed when controlled is increased in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A.

In this way, in the characteristic portion 049AK, when the setting suggesting effect is executed in which "blue" lighting is performed in the "mode B", and in the "mode C", the "blue" lighting is performed. When the setting suggestion effect is executed, both are common setting suggestion effects such as lighting "blue", but one suggests that the ratio of even setting values is high, The other definitely notifies that it is an even setting value. That is, when the setting suggestion effect of lighting "blue" is executed, it may or may not be determined that the set value is even. In this manner, even if the setting suggestion performance is common, the content of suggestion can be made different according to which performance mode it is in among a plurality of performance modes, and the variations related to the setting suggestion performance are increased to improve the game amusement. can be made In addition, although a common setting suggestion performance can be executed regardless of which performance mode is selected among a plurality of performance modes, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion performance differs according to the set performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggesting effect and improve the amusement of the game.

Returning to FIG. 12-3, after executing the process of step 049AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggesting effect of the determined type (step 049AKS015), and ends the setting suggesting effect process. Note that the executed setting suggesting effect may end at the timing when the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0" in the ending effect process of step S177, for example.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, similarly to the characteristic portion 048AK, a predetermined number of times (100 times) of the special game is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, or before the predetermined number of times of the special game is executed. The game state is controlled to the probability variable state until any of the conditions of becoming a jackpot game state is satisfied. In the characteristic portion 049AK, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable probability state ends by executing the special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times), and at the timing when the game state is controlled to the normal state, the normal state is entered. It is possible to execute a mode suggesting effect for suggesting to the player which effect mode the effect mode to be shifted to when controlled is.

FIG. 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing executed in the characterizing portion 049AK. In the variable display start setting process, execution setting of the mode suggestion effect is performed. Note that the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 12-6 is different from the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 11-22) executed in the characteristic part 048AK, since step 048AKS010 is executed in the characteristic part 048AK. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 049AK, the process of step S523 is executed. Further, while the processing of step 048AKS032 is executed in the characteristic portion 048AK, the processing of step 049AKS021 is executed in the characteristic portion 049AK. Since other processing is the same as the variable display start setting processing shown in FIG. 11-22, description thereof is omitted.

When it is determined that it is a non-reach variation pattern in step S522 shown in FIG. 12-6 (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of final stop symbols that constitutes a non-reach combination. is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined left finalized symbol stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, etc., the left confirmed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decoration symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decoration symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right finalized symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122, is extracted, and a predetermined right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the right confirmed decorative design to be stop-displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined. In addition, in the process of step S523, it is only necessary to determine the fixed decoration symbol of the non-reach combination which is the predetermined chance eye symbol corresponding to the case where the variable symbol notice is being executed.

Then, in step 048AKS031, when it is determined that it is controlled to the probability variable state and is the final variation in the probability variable state (step 048AKS031; Yes), the execution setting of the mode suggestion performance that suggests the performance mode to be controlled during the next normal state Mode suggestion effect setting processing to be performed is executed (step 049AKS021). As a result, the mode suggestion effect is executed in the final variation in the probability variation state. By executing the mode suggesting effect in this way, the player can predict which effect mode the game will be controlled to, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, even if the mode suggestion effect is not during the final variation in the probability variation state, for example, it is the final variation in the probability variation state in the special figure per waiting process of step S173 in FIG. You may According to this, it becomes possible to execute the mode suggesting effect at the timing after the final variation in the variable probability state, and it is possible to suggest the effect mode at a timing closer to returning from the variable probability state to the normal state.

FIG. 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of mode suggestion effect setting processing executed in step 049AKS021 of FIG. 12-6. In the mode suggestion effect setting process shown in FIG. 12-6, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the next effect mode by checking the effect mode storage buffer (step 049AKS031). For example, if the current presentation mode is "mode A" and the next presentation mode is "mode C", then in step 049AKS031, "mode C" is specified as the next presentation mode.

After executing the process of step 049AKS031, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of mode suggesting effect to be executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-8 according to the specified effect mode (step 049AKS032). As shown in FIG. 12-8, in the characteristic part 049AK, the mode suggestion effect of "suggestion A" that suggests that the next mode (the effect mode to be shifted when being controlled to the normal state) is "mode A" , There is a mode suggestion effect of "suggestion B" that suggests that it is "mode B" and a mode suggestion effect of "suggestion C" that suggests that it is "mode C", and the type of "suggestion C" The decision ratio is set so as to definitely notify that the next mode is 'mode B' or 'mode C', that is, not 'mode A', when the mode suggesting performance is executed. Note that, as described above, in the characteristic portion 049AK, the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect that is executed at the time of control increases in the order of Mode C>Mode B>Mode A. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the mode suggesting effect of the type of "suggestion C". Note that the mode suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 049AK may be, for example, by displaying one of the characters A to C on the image display device 5, thereby suggesting the mode A to mode C respectively as the next mode. For example, "suggestion A" displays an image, "suggestion B" lights a lamp in a predetermined color, and "suggestion C" outputs sound. may be performed.

Returning to FIG. 12-7, after executing the process of step 049AKS032, the effect control CPU 120 updates the contents of the effect mode storage buffer (step 049AKS033), and terminates the mode suggestion effect setting process. In the process of step 049AKS033, the content stored as the next performance mode is updated as the current performance mode. For example, if the current production mode is "mode A" and the next production mode is "mode C", "mode C" is shifted to the current production mode. As a result, the variable probability state is terminated, and at the timing of the normal state, the effect mode of the content stored in the current effect mode of the effect mode storage buffer is controlled. For example, in the special figure per waiting process of step S173 of FIG. It is sufficient to make settings to shift to the mode.

FIG. 12-9 is a timing chart showing transitions between game states and presentation states. Here, a case where the current production mode is "mode A" and the next production mode is determined to be "mode C" will be described as an example. In addition, it is assumed that the gaming state up to the big hit 1 shown in the figure is the normal state. When a big hit occurs while the current production mode is controlled to "mode A" (jackpot 1 shown), the production mode determination process shown in FIG. 12-1(A) is executed, and as shown in FIG. Then, the production mode (next mode) for the next normal state is determined (mode C is determined in this example). Then, it is controlled to the jackpot game state of jackpot 1, and when it comes to the ending of jackpot 1, the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect at the indicated ratio, and if it is to be executed, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the set value according to the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-5(A). will be As shown in FIG. 12-9, after the jackpot game state of jackpot 1 is finished, the game state is controlled to the variable probability state. In addition, the probability variable state is obtained by executing a special game a predetermined number of times (100 times) after the end of the big win game state, or by entering a big win game state before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. Although it ends, the illustrated example shows a case where the game ends when the special figure game is executed 100 times.

Subsequently, when it comes to the final variation of the probability variable state, the mode suggestion effect setting process shown in FIG. A mode suggesting effect suggesting the effect mode to be played is executed, and the next mode is updated to the current mode (mode C is the current mode). As a result, the effect mode in the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed next is suggested, so that the player's attention can be attracted. In addition, when the suggestion (suggestion C) for the performance mode C is performed, the reliability of the setting suggestion performance to be executed after that is high, so the setting suggestion performance to be executed at the end timing of the jackpot game state thereafter. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to confirm the content suggested by , and to promote the operation.

It should be noted that, as described above, the effect mode controlled in the characteristic portion 049AK is unrecognizable to the player. Therefore, the player predicts the effect mode to be controlled next by executing the mode suggesting effect. As shown in Fig. 12-2(A), the even setting value and the higher setting value (setting value "4" or "6") change the mode from "mode A" to "mode C". The decision ratio is set to facilitate the transition. Therefore, when the mode suggesting effect executed last time is a suggestion (suggestion A) corresponding to mode A, and the mode suggesting effect executed this time is a suggestion (suggestion C) corresponding to mode C, the player It can be predicted that mode A has been transferred to mode C. In this case, since the player expects the setting value to be ``4'' or ``6'', the high setting is suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed at the end timing of the jackpot game state thereafter. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to confirm, and to promote the operation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-2(B), since the determination ratio is set so as not to shift from "mode B" to "mode A", the executed mode suggesting effect corresponds to mode B. If it is a suggestion (suggestion B), the production mode to be shifted next is a production mode C that is a production mode with a high degree of reliability of the contents suggested by the setting suggestion production executed when controlled. A sense of anticipation can be given to the player, and the operation can be promoted until the next big win game state is reached. Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK, as shown in FIG. 12-2(C), as the set value of even number and the highest set value (set value “6”) are set, “mode C” changes to “mode The decision ratio is set so that it is easy to shift to B'. Therefore, when the mode suggesting effect executed last time is a suggestion (suggestion C) corresponding to mode C, and the mode suggesting effect executed this time is a suggestion (suggestion B) corresponding to mode B, It can be predicted that mode C has been transferred to mode B. In this case, since the player expects the maximum set value, the high setting is suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed at the end timing of the jackpot game state after that, and the maximum set value may be set. It is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to confirm that the is high, and to promote the operation.

Returning to FIG. 12-9, when the final variation of the variable probability state is completed, the game state becomes the normal state, and the effect mode (mode C) determined when the jackpot 1 is reached is controlled. Then, when a big win is made again (big win 2 shown in the figure), the production mode (next mode) in the next normal state is determined, and in the ending of the big win 2, corresponding to mode C which is the current production state, as shown in FIG. 4, it is determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and if it is to be executed, the setting suggestion effect is performed based on the set values according to the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-5(C). is done.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 049AK of the present embodiment, as the effect state internally provided for performing the lottery related to the execution of the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to control one of a plurality of types of effect modes. is. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-5, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in which "blue" lighting is performed in "mode B", and "blue" lighting is performed in "mode C". When the setting suggestion effect is executed, both are common setting suggestion effects such as lighting "blue", but one suggests that the ratio of even setting values is high On the other hand, the other definitely notifies that the set value is an even number. Therefore, even when the common setting suggesting effect is performed, the suggesting content differs depending on which effect mode is controlled. According to this, by providing a plurality of performance modes, it is possible to increase the variations related to the setting suggestion performance and improve the game interest.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characterizing part 049AK of the present embodiment, although it is possible to execute a common setting suggestion effect regardless of which effect mode it is in a plurality of effect modes, Fig. 12-4 , the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect differs according to the set effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggesting effect and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the characteristic part 049AK, when the game state is controlled to the normal state, it is controlled to any one of a plurality of types of production modes, but in the variable probability state, it is not controlled to any production mode. That is, when the game state is the normal state, the number of controllable effect modes is greater than when the game state is the probability variable constant match. According to this, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in a normal state, which is not in an advantageous state for the player.

Moreover, the production mode in the characteristic part 049AK is a common mode in any production mode, and is an internal state that the player cannot recognize. Then, in the characteristic portion 049AK, it is possible to execute a mode suggesting effect for suggesting to the player which effect mode is the effect mode to be shifted to when the normal state is controlled. According to this, it is possible to make the player anticipate in which direction the control will be performed, and to enhance the interest in the game.

Also, in the characteristic part 049AK, the mode suggestion effect is executed in the final variation in the probability variation state. Furthermore, it is possible to execute the mode suggestion effect at the timing after the final variation in the probability variation state. That is, in the characteristic portion 049AK, the player is suggested to which effect state to be controlled at the timing of control from the variable probability state to the normal state. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention at the timing of returning from the variable probability state to the normal state.

In addition, in the characteristic part 049AK, it is possible to execute a mode suggesting effect, and as an ending effect during the jackpot game state, a setting suggesting effect corresponding to the effect mode is executed. According to this, the set value set by the combination of the mode suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect can be predicted, and the variations of the effect can be increased.

In addition, in the characteristic part 049AK, when it is determined that there is reception of an effect control command designating to start the big hit game state in the special figure per waiting process of step S173 in FIG. 7, it is controlled to the normal state next. Determines the production mode to be controlled (transitioned) when According to this, it is possible to improve interest in which production mode is to be set at the timing when the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 049AK)
The characteristic part 049AK shows an example of determining the type of setting suggestion effect to be executed using the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-5 in the setting suggestion effect processing shown in FIG. 12-3, but this is just an example. is. The setting suggestion execution table can be arbitrarily changed, and for example, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-10 may be used. Specifically, the setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-10(A) is set so as to definitively notify that the set value is equal to or greater than "2" when "red" is lit. The setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-10(B) is set to deterministically notify that the set value is 3 or more when the red light is turned on. The setting suggestion execution table shown in FIG. 12-10(C) is set to deterministically notify that the set value is "4" or more when "red" is lit. In this way, when the common "red" lighting is performed, which of the set values "2" to "4" the set value is greater than or equal to is set differently depending on the effect mode being controlled. good too. According to this, when the mode suggesting effect of suggestion C is executed, it is possible to improve the feeling of expectation for the lighting of "red" in the setting suggesting effect to be executed thereafter.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK in the above embodiment, it is controlled to one of the plurality of production modes as the production state only when the game state is the normal state, and in the variable probability state, it is not controlled to any production mode. But this is just one example. There may be an effect mode controlled in the variable probability state. And the number of production modes controlled in the variable probability state should be less than the number of production modes controlled in the normal state. According to this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect during control to the normal state. In addition, what is necessary is just to determine when determining the controllable production mode in a normal state also about the production mode controllable in a variable-probability state. Then, at the ending of the jackpot game state during the continuous game state, the setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the effect mode during the variable probability state.

Further, in the characteristic portion 049AK in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined that there is reception of an effect control command designating to start the jackpot game state in the special figure per waiting process of step S173, the next normal state Although the example which determines the production mode which controls when controlled (shifts) was shown, this is an example. The determination timing may be, for example, during the jackpot game state or during the variable probability state. Also, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect may not be during the ending effect in the jackpot game state, and may be during fluctuation (for example, during the reach effect of super reach or before the reach state). In this case, in the variable display start setting process of step S171, execution/non-execution of the setting suggestion effect may be determined according to the effect mode according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 12-4. According to this, it is possible to heighten the player's interest in which effect state the game is controlled to. Also, the mode suggesting effect may not be the final variation in the variable probability state, for example, it may be performed in any variation during the variable probability state, or it may be performed in the ending effect in the big win game state. As for the execution timing of the setting suggesting effect, for example, it may be executed every 50 fluctuations in the normal state, or when a time or measurement period predetermined by a real-time clock or an internal timer becomes a predetermined period. It can be executed in time. In addition, whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be determined by a different determination ratio depending on the display result in each fluctuation, or whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the display result. may Note that the setting suggesting effect may suggest that the setting value has been changed.

In addition, when only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to the low probability high base state, the mode suggestion performance may be executed in the variation when the time saving control ends. Also, for example, in a gaming machine in which the variable probability control continues until the next big hit gaming state starts, and the continuous game state ends when the non-variable big win type jackpot is reached and the time reduction control ends after that, As described above, it may be controlled to one of the production modes as the production mode in the variable probability state, and based on the production mode, the setting suggestion production may be executed during the fluctuation in the variable probability state. More specifically, when the number of winning game balls in the variable winning ball device 6B exceeds a predetermined number, or when the number of shot game balls reaches a predetermined number or more, the game enters into a state of addiction. It is determined that it is done, and the setting suggestion effect is executed. According to this, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game in a so-called immersive state during a series of villas.

Further, in the characterizing part 049AK in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which "Mode A" is stored as the current production mode in the initial state in the production mode storage buffer, but this is just an example. When the power is turned on, the current presentation mode may be determined by lottery. In this case, the decision ratio of the production mode set according to the set value at the time of power-on may be different. According to this, the lottery relating to the state of presentation is diversified and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, it is sufficient if the mode suggesting effect can be executed based on the effect mode in the change after the power is turned on (for example, the first change or one of ten changes).

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio of mode C is determined to be high. In the characteristic portion 049AK, since the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect executed during control increases in the order of mode C>mode B>mode A, according to this, the power source Since the setting suggesting effect executed in the first game at the time of introduction suggests contents with high reliability, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player who starts the game immediately after the opening of the game parlor. In addition, since the production mode is not backed up at the time of power failure, the production mode after restoration may be different from the production mode before restoration. In such a case, if the mode suggesting effect of the type of "suggestion C" is executed, it will be definitely notified that the next mode is not "mode A", but actually "mode A" will be notified. This may confuse the player, lower the reliability of the mode suggesting effect, and lower the interest in the game. Therefore, in order to prevent such a situation, in the mode suggesting effect at the time of power-on, instead of using the determined ratio shown in FIG. It suffices to determine the type of mode suggestion effect to be executed by

(Description of Characteristic Portion 050AK)
Next, the characterizing portion 050AK of this embodiment will be described. In addition, in order to make the explanation easier to understand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 050AK, as in the characteristic portion 048AK, once a big hit occurs, 100% probability variation control is performed after the end of the big hit game state. shall be That is, as with the characteristic portion 048AK, as the jackpot types, jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot F" shown in FIGS. 11-12 are prepared. In addition, in the pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 050AK, either or both of the first special figure and the second special figure, only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, and the state is shifted to the low probability high base state. A jackpot type G (also referred to as a non-probability variable jackpot) or a jackpot type of a jackpot H in which variable probability control continues until the next big win (that is, does not end depending on the number of times) may be set. In addition, there may be a jackpot type in which neither the high-precision control nor the time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game is over.

In the characteristic portion 050AK, a suggestion is made regarding a set value set by a specific effect executed before being controlled to the big win game state and a special effect executed in the big win game state. Although the details will be described later, the specific effect in the characteristic portion 050AK is an effect of displaying one of a plurality of types of character images in accordance with a set value in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect. In addition, the special effect in the characteristic part 050AK is an effect executed in the ending effect in the jackpot game state when the specific effect is executed, and the character displayed in the executed specific effect battles with the enemy character. It is a battle production that performs In addition, in the characteristic portion 050AK in this embodiment, an example of executing a special effect as an ending effect in the big hit game state is shown, but the special effect may be executed as a round game in the big win game state, for example. In addition, special effects may be performed only for a specific round such as the 5th round, or multiple rounds in the latter half of the total number of rounds, such as the 5th to 8th rounds (in the case of 8 rounds with a big hit B). You may perform a special production over.

FIG. 13-1 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing executed by the characterizing portion 050AK. The variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 13-1 is different from the variable display start setting process (see FIG. 11-22) executed in the characteristic part 048AK, whereas the characteristic part 048AK executes step 048AKS010. , the characteristic part 050AK executes the process of step S523 (since it is the same as the characteristic part 049AK, the description is omitted). Further, while the processing of steps 048AKS031 and 048AKS032 is executed in the characteristic portion 048AK, the processing of steps S528 and 050AKS001 is executed in the characteristic portion 050AK. Since other processing is the same as the variable display start setting processing shown in FIG. 11-22, description thereof is omitted.

After executing any of the processes of step S524, step S527, and step S526 shown in FIG. 13-1, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a variation pattern of super reach (step S528). In the process of step S528, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11, it is possible to determine whether or not the variation pattern is super reach. When it is determined in step S528 that it is a variation pattern of super reach (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes a specific effect execution setting process for executing a specific effect (step 050AKS001).

FIG. 13-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the specific effect execution setting process executed at step 050AKS001 shown in FIG. 13-1. In the specific effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 13-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the specific effect according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-3 (step 050AKS011). In the illustrated example, a common determination ratio is used regardless of the variable display result, but different determination ratios may be used depending on the variable display result. Moreover, it is good also as a determination ratio which differs according to the kind of super reach.

Returning to FIG. 13-2, after executing the processing of step 050AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the specific effect, that is, whether or not the specific effect is executed (step 050AKS012). If the specific effect is not executed (step 050AKS012; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the specific effect execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, if the specific effect is to be executed, that is, if there is execution (step 050AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of specific effect to be executed according to the set value according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-4. Determine (step 050AKS013).

In the characteristic portion 050AK, as shown in the figure, specific effects of types "character A" to "character C" are prepared as specific effects. The specific effects of "character A" to "character C" are effects in which images of "character A" to "character C" are displayed, respectively. As shown in FIG. 13-4, in the characteristic portion 050AK, when the specific effect of the type of "character C" is executed, the set value must be 2 or more (that is, not the minimum set value of 1). The decision percentage is set to be fixed. Therefore, the execution of the specific effect of the type of character C can arouse the player's expectation of wanting to feel secure that the set value is not the minimum setting value. Note that the characterizing portion 050AK in this embodiment shows an example in which the type of specific effect to be executed is determined at different ratios according to the setting value, but regardless of which setting value is set, It may be determined by a common ratio.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 050AK, the character image of each type is displayed in the second half of the super reach (predetermined time before the variable display result is displayed) in common with each type of "character A" to "character C". The display timing of the character image is predetermined. The display timing of each character image may differ according to the type of specific effect to be executed. For example, the type of character B may be displayed later than that of character A, and the type of character C may be displayed later than that of character B. By the processing of step 050AKS013 in FIG. 13-2, the type of specific effect to be executed is determined, and the execution timing (character image display timing) is also determined. The timing for executing the specific effect may be set by a timer such as 10 seconds before the variable display result is displayed. It should be noted that the setting may be such as 40 seconds after the start of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. Since the reach effect period differs depending on the type of super reach, according to this setting, depending on the type of super reach, the specific effect will be executed at an early stage during the reach effect period of super reach. , It is possible to expand the range of production and improve interest. In the characteristic part 050AK, the specific effect is executed in the latter half of the super ready-to-win effect. can be It does not have to be executed during super reach, regardless of whether or not it becomes reach, it may be executed, for example, every 50 fluctuations, or a time or measurement period predetermined by a real-time clock, internal timer, etc. may be executed at a timing when is a predetermined period.

After executing the processing of step 050AKS013, the effect control CPU 120 sets the specific effect flag indicating that the specific effect is to be executed to the ON state (step 050AKS014), and then ends the specific effect execution setting process. The specific effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and is cleared to an OFF state by executing a special effect described later. In addition, in the characteristic part 050AK in this embodiment, even if the variable display result is "losing", the specific effect is executed, but the special effect is not executed (because it is executed in the jackpot game state). ). Therefore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the specific effect flag set to the ON state at step 050AKS014 is cleared to the OFF state by executing the special effect described later, while the variable display If the result is "losing", the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not received in the special figure per waiting process of step S173, and the waiting time for receiving the command is It should be cleared to the OFF state when it has passed. In addition, once the specific effect is executed, it may be executed for a period of time until the variable display result is derived and displayed (the determined type of character image may be continuously displayed). That is, the specific effect execution period may be a period from the latter half of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win until the variable display result is derived and displayed. It should be noted that, for example, every 50 fluctuations, when the specific effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined time or the measurement period by the real-time clock or internal timer becomes a predetermined period, it is erased after the fluctuation, and again It may be displayed when the execution timing comes. Furthermore, once the specific effect is executed, it may be continuously executed over a plurality of variations until the variable display result becomes a big hit (the character image may be continuously displayed). ). In this case, in the special figure per waiting process of step S173, without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed, the specific effect Instead of clearing the flag to the off state, the flag should remain on. Then, when the specific effect flag is already on at step 050AKS001, the specific effect execution setting process may be terminated. According to this, it is possible to prevent overlooking which type of specific effect the executed specific effect is.

FIG. 13-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special effect processing executed by the characterizing part 050AK. The special effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process of step S177 of FIG. 7, and is a process of executing a special effect corresponding to the executed specific effect as the ending effect. When the special effect processing shown in FIG. 13-5 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the specific effect flag is set to the ON state (step 050AKS021). If the specific effect flag is off (step 050AKS021; No), the special effect processing is terminated because the specific effect is not executed.

On the other hand, when the specific effect flag is ON (step 050AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of the executed specific effect (step 050AKS022). For example, when the type of specific effect is determined at step 050AKS013 in FIG. 13-2, the determined content is stored, and at step 050AKS022, the type of specific effect is identified by confirming this content. It should be noted that specific effect flag A to specific effect flag C may be prepared according to the type of specific effect, and the corresponding type of specific effect flag may be set to the ON state at step 050AKS014 in FIG. 13-2. In that case, at step 050AKS022, the type of specific effect may be specified depending on which specific effect flag is in the ON state.

After executing the process of step 050AKS022 in FIG. 13-5, the effect control CPU 120 is according to the determined ratio shown in one of FIGS. 13-6 (A) to (C) according to the type of specified specific effect The type of special effect to be executed is determined according to the set value, and the determined type of special effect is executed (step 050AKS023). As described above, the special effect executed in the characteristic portion 050AK is a battle effect in which a character displayed in a specific effect battles an enemy character. A special effect of a type such as "defeat" is prepared. "Victory", "Draw", and "Loss" each indicate the result of the battle production. In the characteristic part 050AK, a battle effect is performed as a special effect, and the result differs depending on the type of special effect. The type of the performance itself may be different according to the type of the special performance, such as the performance of dancing.

FIG. 13-6(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the type of specific effect executed is "character A". As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the "character A" type specific effect is executed, when the character of "character A" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. The determination ratio is set so as to deterministically notify that the minimum set value "1" is denied (the set value is "2" or more) when the minimum set value is set. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that he/she wants to feel relieved that the minimum set value is not reached by executing the "win" special effect.

FIG. 13-6(B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the type of specific effect executed is "character B". As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the "character B" type specific effect is executed, when the character of "character B" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. The determination ratio is set so as to deterministically notify that the set value is "3" or more when the set value is set. Also, FIG. 13-6(C) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the type of the executed specific effect is "character C". As shown in the figure, in the special effect when the "character C" type specific effect is executed, when the character of "character C" "wins" as a result of the battle, that is, the special effect of "winning" is executed. The decision ratio is set so that when the set value is "4" or more, it is definitely notified. In this way, in the characteristic part 050AK of this embodiment, when a special effect of the type of "win" is executed, a definitive notification regarding the set value is performed (for example, a definitive notification that the set value has been changed is performed). ), it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the execution of the "win" type special effect.

Returning to FIG. 13-5, after executing the process of step 050AKS023, the effect control CPU 120 clears the specific effect flag to the OFF state (step 050AKS024), and then ends the special effect process. In addition, in the characterizing part 050AK in this embodiment, the execution setting of the specific effect is performed at step 050AKS001 of FIG. 13-1, and the special effect is executed at step 050AKS023 of FIG. 13-5. (execution/non-execution, type of execution, etc.) are determined by two processes. For example, in step 050AKS001 of FIG. good too. In this case, if the result of the variable display is "losing", it may be decided not to execute the special effect.

FIG. 13-7 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a specific effect and a special effect are executed. In the illustrated example, a specific effect for "Character A" is executed, and a special effect for "Victory" is executed, that is, a setting suggestion effect is performed to definitely notify that the lowest setting value is reached. An example is given. Variable display starts as shown in Figure 13-7 (a), becomes reach state as shown in Figure 13-7 (b), develops into super reach, and then as shown in Figure 13-7 (c) Then, in the second half of the ready-to-win performance of super reach, the specific performance execution period is reached, and the specific performance is executed. As shown in the figure, the image CH1 as the teammate character A is displayed in the lower right region of the image display device 5 by executing the specific effect.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 13-7(d), a variable display result is displayed and the game is controlled to a big hit game state. In the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 13-7(e), the number of round games corresponding to the jackpot type is performed. Then, when it comes to the ending of the jackpot game state, as shown in FIGS. , an image CH2 as an enemy character is displayed, and an effect in which each character battles is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-7(h), the battle is won, and the jackpot game state ends.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 050K of the present embodiment, the specific effect executed in the second half of the reach effect of the super reach and the special effect executed in the ending effect in the jackpot game state are set. Suggestions about the settings that are being used. According to this, it is possible to increase the variation regarding the setting suggesting effect according to the types of the specific effect and the special effect to be executed, thereby improving the game interest.

Further, once the specific effect in the characteristic part 050AK is executed, it is executed until the variable display result is derived and displayed. Moreover, once the specific effect in the characterizing part 050AK is executed, it may be continuously executed over a plurality of times of variation until the variable display result becomes a big hit. According to this, it is possible to prevent overlooking which type of specific effect the executed specific effect is.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 050AK)
In the characteristic part 050AK in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which one of a plurality of types of character images is displayed according to the set value in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect as the specific effect. , which is an example. The character image displayed as the specific effect may be, for example, an eye-catching image. The eye-catching image is an image that is displayed for a relatively short period of time (fixed at 1 second in this example) that is interposed between presentations (see, for example, FIG. 13-8(e)). Note that the eye-catching image may include characters that are not related to the content of the effect related to the lottery result related to the game (for example, characters such as the model name of the gaming machine). It is preferable that it is an image that can be stolen. It should be noted that the eye-catching image may be displayed when the result of the variable display is "loss". Then, the special effect may be executed when a big win is achieved in the variable display that is performed after the variable display in which the eye-catching image is displayed.

In this example, the eye-catching image is displayed after the background of the super ready-to-win state is displayed and before the background of decorative symbols to reach the ready-to-win state is displayed. Here, the background refers to all images (still images, moving images) other than decorative patterns (pictured patterns, pictureless patterns, small patterns) in variable display. It also includes images such as CG images and live-action images.

FIG. 13-8 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when an eye-catching image is displayed as a character image displayed as a specific effect. First, as shown in FIGS. 13-8(a) to 13-8(b), the normal background (here, mountain background) is displayed, and a variable display of decorative patterns in Gothic font is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (c), when the reach state is reached, a super reach background (here, an image of the universe) is displayed, and the variable display of the decoration pattern of the small pattern is matched with the super reach background. are switched in order at a predetermined timing and executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8 (d), from the continuation of FIG. 13-8 (c) until the losing pattern is displayed, the super reach background is displayed in the same way as in FIG. 13-8 (c), The variable display of the small pattern (only during the reach state) and the variable display of the Mincho decorative pattern (from the reach state to the display of the lost pattern) are switched in order at a predetermined timing according to the super reach background. executed. In addition, the Mincho decorative pattern of the missing pattern is displayed in a shaking display mode (a mode indicating that the display result is undetermined).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-8(e), for a predetermined period of time after the lost pattern is displayed, the small lost pattern is displayed in a shaking display mode (one second in this embodiment). At the same time, an eye-catching image is displayed instead of the background. The eye-catching image in this example may be a character image of one of the types "Character A" to "Character C" in the above-described embodiment, and an image with the model name of the pachinko machine 1 added. may be During the display of the eye-catching image, the transmittance of the image of the small pattern may be increased or the display of the small pattern may be omitted compared to before the eye-catching image is displayed.

After that, when the design confirmation command is received, as shown in FIG. 13-8(f), the background is switched to the normal background, and the missing Gothic decorative design is stopped and displayed as the finalized decorative design. Then, when a command at the start of variation such as the next variation start command is received, the next variation display is started as shown in FIG. 13-8(g). The mode of the variable display at this time is the same as in FIG. 13-8(a).

Here, as shown in FIG. 13-8(e), during the display of the eye-catching image, the small missing symbols are displayed, so the player can confirm the results of the variable display. In addition, since the types of eye-catching images are displayed at different ratios according to the set values, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the types of eye-catching images to be displayed. Furthermore, since an eye-catching image is displayed as a specific effect when a losing pattern is displayed, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play the special effect to be executed thereafter. It should be noted that after the eye-catching image is displayed and the background is switched to the normal background, it may be possible to execute a relief effect in which the result of the variable display is a big win.

Further, in the characterizing portion 050AK in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the specific effect is the effect of displaying a character image in the second half of the super ready-to-win effect, but this is just an example. The specific effect may be, for example, a mode suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 049AK. Specifically, the character image of any one of the characters A to C is displayed according to the effect state as a mode suggesting effect suggesting which effect state of the effect mode A to effect mode C the effect mode is selected. In the ending in the jackpot game state, a battle effect by the displayed character may be executed as a special effect. According to this, by providing a plurality of production modes, it is possible to increase the variation of suggestion regarding the setting value and improve the game interest.

Also, in such a case, when the power is turned on, the current production mode is determined by lottery, and in the fluctuation after the power is turned on (for example, the first fluctuation or the fluctuation of 10 times), the production It suffices if the mode suggestion effect can be executed based on the mode. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the determination ratio may be set so that the ratio of mode C is determined to be high. In addition, since the reliability of the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect that is executed at the time of control increases in the order of Mode C > Mode B > Mode A, the first game when the power is turned on , the setting suggestion effect executed as a combination of the specific effect and the special effect suggests content with high reliability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for the game after the power is turned on.

(Explanation relating to association of characteristic portions)
Each configuration regarding the characteristic portion 048AK, the characteristic portion 049AK, and the characteristic portion 050AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration regarding other characteristic portions. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate. For example, in the probability variable state, the set value is suggested by a predetermined display like the characteristic part 048AK, and in the normal state, the set value is set at the ending in the big hit game state based on the controlled mode like the characteristic part 049AK You may make suggestions regarding Further, as described above, the mode suggestion effect at the characteristic portion 049AK may be the specific effect at the characteristic portion 050AK, and the setting value may be suggested by the specific effect and the special effect.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball operating handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of identification information and being able to be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
a storage means capable of storing information relating to variable display of identification information;
a determining means for determining whether to control to the advantageous state;
Determination means for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state before determination by the determination means;
As the specific display corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to display a pending display corresponding to the information stored in the storage means based on the determination result of the determination means and a special display corresponding to the variable display being executed. display means;
change effect execution means for executing a change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display;
and a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect,
When the specific effect is being executed, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change than when the specific effect is not being executed,
The specific effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect ends during execution of the variable display corresponding to the determination result,
Even after the end of the specific effect, the specific display whose display mode changed while the specific effect was being executed is compared to the specific display whose display mode did not change while the specific effect was being executed. is also easy to change the display mode,
The specific display whose display mode is changed to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is executed has a different display mode than the specific display whose display mode is changed to a predetermined mode when the specific effect is not performed. easy,
A notification image that enables recognition that the specific effect is being executed can be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the specific display,
As a display mode after the change of the specific display, a first mode and a second mode in which the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first mode,
After executing the specific effect, it is possible to execute the special effect with a higher degree of expectation than the specific effect,
When the special effect is executed, the specific display changes to the second mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images